JP2012110784A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine for reducing the capacity of a data storage area.SOLUTION: First variation pattern selection processing and second variation pattern selection processing are performed by the same processing routine. A variation pattern including the variation display time of variation displaying in the variation display unit, in which the start condition of the variation displaying is established, out of the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit is selected from the multiple variation patterns. Based on the selected variation pattern, first data indicating the variation display time of the variation displaying to be performed in the first variation display unit and second data indicating the variation display time of the variation displaying to be performed in the second variation display unit are stored in the same storage area.

Description

  According to the present invention, after the game ball has won the first start area, the first start condition that enables the start of the variable display based on the win is established, so First variation display means for starting the first variation display by the identification information and deriving and displaying the display result, and after the game ball has won the second starting area, the variation display based on the winning can be started. And a second variation display means for starting the second variation display based on the second identification information that can be identified and deriving and displaying the display result based on the fact that the start condition of 2 is established. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means or the second variation display means.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, there is provided a variable display device capable of changing the display state, and configured to give a predetermined game value to the player when the display result of the variable display device is in a predetermined specific display mode. is there.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, the combination of a specific display mode with a predetermined display result of a variable display on a variable display device is usually referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 08-084807 JP 2005-312813 A

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the capacity of a data storage area when performing variation display in the first variation display means and second variation display means and production display corresponding thereto. To do.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is identifiable based on the fact that the first start condition that enables the start of variable display based on the winning is established after the game ball has won the first starting area. The first variation display means for starting the first variation display by the first identification information and deriving and displaying the display result, and after the game ball has won the second starting area, the variation display based on the winning can be started. And second variation display means for starting the second variation display based on the second identification information that can be identified and deriving and displaying the display result based on the fact that the second start condition is established. A gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous for a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the first fluctuation display means or the second fluctuation display means, and a game ball can enter Open and game balls cannot enter Variable winning device that can be changed to a closed state, variable winning device control means for changing the variable winning device from a closed state to an open state when shifting to a specific gaming state, and a game ball that has entered the variable winning device is detected A winning detection means for outputting a winning detection signal, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means for controlling the effect means based on a command from the game control means. The first variation display is started by the first variation display means when the first start condition is satisfied on condition that neither the first variation display nor the second variation display is executed. When the second start condition is satisfied on the condition that none of the 1 fluctuation display start means, the first fluctuation display, and the second fluctuation display are executed, the second fluctuation display means uses the second fluctuation display means. The fluctuation display of The variation pattern including the variation display time from the start of the variation display of the first variation display to the end of the variation display in the first variation display means that satisfies the first start condition is selected. A variation pattern including a variation display time from the start of variation display of the second variation display in the second variation display means for which the second start condition is satisfied to the end of variation display. The second variation pattern selection process for selecting is executed by the same processing routine, and the variation display unit in the variation display unit that satisfies the variation display start condition is established among the first variation display unit and the second variation display unit. A variation pattern selection unit that selects a variation pattern including a variation display time from a plurality of variation patterns, and a variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit. The first data indicating the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display executed in the first fluctuation display means when the first start condition is satisfied, and the second fluctuation display means when the second start condition is satisfied. The variable display time storage means for storing the second data indicating the variable display time of the variable display to be executed in the same storage area, and the variable winning device control means when the variable winning device is not controlled to the open state Based on the fact that the winning detection means outputs the winning detection signal, the abnormal winning determining means for determining that an abnormal winning has occurred, and whether or not a predetermined state different from the abnormal winning has occurred in the gaming machine is determined. Based on the determination that the abnormal winning has occurred by the state determination means and the abnormal winning determination means or that the predetermined determination has occurred by the state determination means, Including an external output means for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine, and the effect control means is based on a command transmitted when the abnormal winning determination means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred, Including an abnormality notification means for performing abnormality notification indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred, and the external output means has generated a predetermined state when the abnormal winning determination means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred and when the state determination means When it is determined that, a predetermined signal can be output from a common output terminal provided in the gaming machine.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the data storage area when performing the fluctuation display in the first fluctuation display means and the second fluctuation display means and the effect display corresponding thereto.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the rear view which looked at the game board for demonstrating the installation position of an information terminal board from the back surface. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the component relevant to payout, such as a payout control board and a ball payout apparatus. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of an information terminal board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. It is a circuit diagram which shows the internal structure of an information terminal board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure which the open detection sensor installed in the vicinity of the big winning opening detects that the big winning opening was opened. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 38E illustrates an effect control command signal line. It is a timing diagram showing the relationship between an 8-bit control signal and an INT signal constituting a control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transmission timing of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area and a pending | holding buffer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the common pending | holding memory number buffer with which a 1st pending memory number and a 2nd pending memory number are provided in common. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory operating process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a payout command signal. It is a block diagram which shows the signal wire | line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a payout command signal etc. It is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a payout command signal and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows each 1 byte buffer formed in RAM used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball waiting processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning ball waiting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball waiting processing 3. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormality alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormality alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormality alerting | reporting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the state of the detection signal of a payout number count switch, and the output state of a prize ball count signal. It is a block diagram which shows the various signals output to an information terminal board. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of the start port 1 signal. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of the symbol fixed number of times 2 signal. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of the symbol fixed number of times 1 signal. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of 1 signal of big hits. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of 2 signals of big hits. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of a time-short signal. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of 4 signals of big hits. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of three jackpot signals. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of an abnormal signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between prize ball payout detection of a prize ball number count switch and a prize ball signal. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of allocation of the output port in the microcomputer for payout control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the bit allocation of the input port in the microcomputer for payout control. It is a flowchart which shows payout control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication process. It is a flowchart which shows main control communication normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during main control communication. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication end process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball lending control process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor stop waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st decoration symbol display control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control processing. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the situation of the display effect in an effect display apparatus, and the sound effect by a speaker. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the situation of the display effect in an effect display apparatus, and the sound effect by a speaker. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the situation of the display effect in an effect display apparatus, and the sound effect by a speaker. It is a timing diagram which shows the detection timing which detects the abnormal winning to a big winning opening (or 2nd start winning opening), and the alerting | reporting timing which performs abnormal winning alert | report (or starting abnormal winning alert | report). It is a flowchart which shows the other example of an abnormality alerting | reporting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality notification process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control process in 2nd Embodiment. Timing chart showing detection timing for detecting an abnormal winning to the big winning opening (or second starting winning opening) and notification timing for executing abnormal winning notification (or starting abnormal winning notification) in the second embodiment. It is. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine in a 3rd embodiment from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command which the microcomputer 560 for game control in 3rd Embodiment transmits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol process process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a process during an accessory release. It is a flowchart which shows a post-completion process. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality notification process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality notification process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality notification process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality notification process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the command analysis process in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on the effect display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on the effect display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on the effect display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control process in 3rd Embodiment.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, there is provided a first special symbol display (first variable display means) 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”. ing. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display means) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”). May be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example. Moreover, the 1st special symbol display 8a and the 2nd special symbol display 8b may each be comprised by the combination of monochrome LED and 7 segment LED, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is established. After the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, for example, a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the first special symbol) And the second special symbol variable display is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are not executed), and the display result when the variable display time has elapsed (Stop symbol) is derived and displayed.

  In this embodiment, winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding a temporary stop before so-called re-variation).

  In this embodiment, when the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second reserved When the stored number is larger than the first reserved stored number, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is performed. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) is performed. There is provided a second decorative symbol display 9b. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display. .

  Further, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may not be provided.

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display 9a are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display 9b. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the big-hit on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the variable symbol display result of normal symbols is a hit, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability variation state (probability variation state) or a short time state (time shortening state), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in a state in which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is open for a longer time than in the normal state. Is done. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won at the second start winning opening 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 14 than the first starting winning port 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the starting memory or the starting prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area for displaying the total number (total number of reserved storage) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (hereinafter referred to as “reserved memory number”). A sum storage storage display area). Since the total pending storage display area for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. Since the total reserved memory display area is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol) (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the variable symbol display result is a win, for example, it is determined that the predetermined condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 32, and the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. You may make it control to. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable winning ball device 15 may be immediately controlled to be in an open state without performing variable display of the normal symbol. Also, for example, when a game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is variably displayed, but the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is unconditionally set without determining whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is a hit. You may make it control to an open state. In this case, an area for storing a hit flag indicating a normal symbol hit becomes unnecessary, and the RAM capacity can be reduced.

  In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Furthermore, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than in the normal state and the short time state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the normal symbol The variable display time is shortened, and the opening time and opening frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. Further, even in the short-time state (the gaming state in which the special symbol variable display time is reduced), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased and the variable symbol variable display time is shortened. The opening time and opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. The state in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended as compared with the normal state means a state in which the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. It is not necessary to increase both the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 in the probability changing state or the short time state, and only the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be increased. May be increased.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state and the time reduction state are controlled in the same manner except that the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol in the probability variation state is higher than that in the normal state and the time reduction state. In other words, in both the probabilistic state and the short-time state, the variable symbol display time is shortened, the probability of hitting the regular symbol variable display result is increased, and the variable symbol variable display time is shortened and variable. The open extension of the winning ball apparatus 15 is performed. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variable symbol variable display time is shortened even in the probability variation state, the probability variation state in this embodiment may be referred to as a probability variation time short state. In addition, you may make it perform different control by a probability change state and a time-short state. For example, the special symbol variable display time may be shortened only when the time is short.

  Note that, as in the case of the probability variation state or the short time state, the probability of hitting the variable symbol display result is increased, the variable symbol variable display time is shortened, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is extended and opened. A gaming state that is present is referred to as a high base state, and a gaming state that is not in a high base state as in the normal state is referred to as a low base state.

  A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c provided on the front frame are provided at the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. Also, a prize ball lamp 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break lamp 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. Is provided.

  An operation button 120 is provided on the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 for the player to operate during the game.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display 9a. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  Next, the type of jackpot and the jackpot will be described.

  When the special symbol stop symbol becomes a probability variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) of the jackpot symbol, it shifts to a jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as probability variation jackpot). In other words, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins a big winning opening. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol is changed to a probability change symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later), the big hit gaming state is continued for 15 rounds.

  Further, when the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a non-probable variation symbol of the big hit symbol, it shifts to a big hit gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a non-probable variable big hit or a normal big hit). In other words, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins a big winning opening. In this embodiment, the big hit game state is continued for 15 rounds even when the big hit game state is shifted to the game based on the fact that the stop symbol has become an uncertain variable symbol.

  In addition, when the special symbol stop symbol becomes a special probability variation symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sudden probability variation symbol), a special jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a “sudden probability variation symbol”) that allows the player to recognize that the gaming state has suddenly shifted to the probability variation state. It is called probable big hit.) In the sudden probability big hit, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In the sudden probability change big hit, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened for one round until it is closed, and the game state for the sudden probability change big hit is continued for two rounds. When a sudden big odd hit is generated, unlike the big round of 15 rounds, the stage display is not proceeding in turn on the stage display device 9, but the game state seems to have suddenly shifted to the rounded state. A special performance is performed to show the person.

  Further, when the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a small hit game, the game shifts to a small hit game state in which the game value given to the player is smaller than the big hit game state. That is, it shifts to a gaming state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, in the small hit game state, the same game value as the game value given to the player when a sudden probability change big hit occurs is given. However, unlike the case of sudden probability change big hit, the gaming state is not shifted to the probability changing state after the small hit gaming state ends. From this, the player expects the occurrence of a probable big hit suddenly rather than the small hit. Even when a small hit occurs, a special effect similar to that at the time of sudden big odd hit is executed. Such a special effect is called a two-round effect.

  Next, game state transition will be described.

(1) When the game is in the normal state or in the short-time state, the winning game is a big hit with a probability variation symbol (excluding the sudden probability variation symbol). As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (either one or both of the background image and the background color) is changed to a background indicating that the probability change state is being established.

(2) In the probability variation state, the probability variation symbol (excluding sudden probability variation symbol) is a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, the probability variation state is maintained without change. As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased continuously, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. It is done. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the probability changing state is in effect.

(3) In the normal state or the short-time state, a big hit is suddenly made with the probability variation symbol, and when the big-hit game ends, the gaming state is shifted from the normal state or the short-time state to the positive variation state. This increases the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol will be a winning symbol. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the chance mode is being performed.

(4) When the probability change state suddenly becomes a big hit with a probability change symbol, and when the big hit game ends, the probability change state is maintained without changing. As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol will continuously become a winning symbol is increased. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the chance mode is being performed.

(5) A big hit is made with a non-probable variable in the normal state or the time-saving state, and when the big-hit game is ended, the time-short state is controlled by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. That is, when the gaming state is the normal state, the transition is made from the normal state to the short-time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations, and when the gaming state is the short-time state, the short-time state is continued for a predetermined number of fluctuations. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the time is being reduced. Then, when the fluctuation of the predetermined number of fluctuations is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short time state to the normal state. At this time, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that it is in a normal state.

(6) A big hit is made with a non-probability variable symbol in the probable change state, and when the big hit game ends, the time is controlled to be reduced by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big win ends. In other words, the state is shifted from the probability variation state to the short time state by a predetermined number of times of variation. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the time is being reduced. Then, when the fluctuation of the predetermined number of fluctuations is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short time state to the normal state. At this time, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that it is in a normal state.

(7) In the normal state, the short time state, or the probability changing state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit game ends, the normal state, the short time state, or the probability changing state is continued without change. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the chance mode is being performed.

  The transition of the gaming state as described above is an example, and is not limited to such a configuration.

  In this embodiment, the probable change symbol of the production symbol is a combination of “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7”, and the non-probability variable symbol is “2” “4”. “6” “8” is the combination of the same even number of the same symbols. For example, the odd variation of “3”, “5”, “7” is the same as the odd variation of the production symbol. The combination is a combination of non-probable symbols with an even number of the same symbols “4”, “6”, and “8”, and a combination of the same symbols of “1” and “2” is also a probability variable symbol. A jackpot symbol that is not a non-probable variable (a jackpot symbol that cannot be recognized as to whether or not it is probable) may be used. In this case, a big hit symbol ("1" or "2") that is neither a probable variable symbol nor a non-probable variable symbol at a predetermined rate (determined by random lottery etc.) when normal big hit and probable variable big hit are determined. ), It is not possible to know whether the gaming state has shifted to the short-time state or to the probabilistic state.

  Next, the installation position of the information terminal board 34 and the internal configuration of the information terminal board 34 will be described. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the game board for explaining the installation position of the information terminal board as seen from the back side. As shown in FIG. 2, an information terminal board 34 is provided on the upper right side of the back surface of the game board 6. The information terminal board 34 may be installed at an arbitrary position. For example, the information terminal board 34 may be installed using an attachment member in front of the effect control board box 2000 when viewed from the back side of the game board 6. In addition, a main board box 3000 containing the main board 31 is provided at the lower part of the back side of the game board 6, and an effect control board box 2000 containing the effect control board 80 is provided at the center of the back side of the game board 6. Is provided. Further, a relay board 77 is provided in the back of the effect control board box 2000 on the back surface of the game board 6 (in the back of the effect control board box 2000 when the game board 6 is viewed from the back side).

  The information terminal board 34 has a connector CN for connecting a cable (signal line) connected to the main board 31 and a plurality of connectors CN1 for connecting a cable (signal line) connected to the hall computer. To CN11. The connector CN and the connectors CN1 to CN11 are connected via a plurality of semiconductor relays (not shown in FIG. 2, refer to FIG. 10).

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  A random number circuit 503 for generating hardware random numbers is connected to the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number value from the random number circuit 503 when the condition for extracting the random number value is satisfied. The random number circuit 503 is a counter that counts clock signals having a predetermined frequency, and the count value of the counter becomes a random value. A clock signal having a predetermined frequency supplied to the random number circuit 503 is input to a clear terminal of a monitoring circuit (watchdog timer (WDT)). The monitoring circuit is a counter that counts a clock signal having a frequency higher than the frequency of the clock signal input to the clear terminal, but the count value is reset when the clock signal input to the clear terminal becomes high level, for example. Therefore, when the clock signal input to the clear terminal stops for some reason, the monitoring circuit counts up. The fact that the monitoring circuit has counted up indicates that the clock signal is not supplied to the random number circuit 503. When the monitoring circuit counts up, it outputs a random number error signal indicating that the random number circuit 503 is not operating normally to the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, total pending memory counter value, time counter value, game state flag, etc.) and the number of unpaid winning balls Is stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer is output when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). In addition, a clear signal indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, the magnetic sensor 90 for detecting a magnetic abnormality in the special winning opening, and the vibration sensor 91 for detecting an abnormal vibration state of the gaming machine. An open detection sensor 92 for detecting the open state of the big prize opening and an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 are also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31. Further, via an information terminal board 34 connected to an external device such as a hall computer, an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state (starting port 1 signal, symbol determination number 2 signal shown in FIG. 61, The main board also has an information output circuit 64 that outputs 1 signal for symbol determination, 1 signal for jackpot, 2 signals for jackpot, time signal, 3 signals for jackpot, 4 signals for jackpot, abnormal signal, prize ball signal, door open signal) to an external device. 31. The information terminal board 34 is installed on the back surface of the gaming machine and is connected only to the main board 31.

  Further, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 includes a door opening switch 154 for detecting that the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate is opened with respect to the front frame, and the gaming frame 11 itself with respect to the outer frame. A door opening switch 155 for detecting that the door is opened is attached. A backup power supply circuit 506 including a backup power supply (for example, a battery or a capacitor) 505 is mounted on the main board 31, and even when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped, a door opening switch The voltage from the backup power source 505 is applied to 154 and the door opening switch 155. The backup power supply 505 may be shared with the backup power supply that supplies the RAM 55. By sharing in this way, the cost of the backup power supply can be reduced. Further, the door opening signal from the door opening switch 154 and the door opening signal from the door opening switch 155 are input to the backup power supply circuit 506 and the game control microcomputer 560, and the door opening of the one input to the backup power supply circuit 506 is input. The signal is input to the information terminal board 34.

  In this embodiment, the signal lines of the door opening signal from the door opening switch 154 and the door opening signal from the door opening switch 155 are physically supplied to the information terminal board 34 via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. Since it is connected, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the door opening signal from the door opening switch 154 and the door opening signal from the door opening switch 155 are supplied to the information terminal board 34. . In addition, since the power from the backup power source 505 mounted on the backup power supply circuit 506 is supplied to the information terminal board 34, the information terminal board 34 has the backup power source even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. A door opening signal can be output to an external device (for example, a hall computer) via the circuit 506.

  In this embodiment, the backup power source for the RAM 55 is provided separately from the backup power source 505 installed in the backup power source circuit 506. In this embodiment, by separately providing the backup power supply as described above, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the RAM 55 from being damaged due to the door open detection state.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control is performed on the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b that variably display the decorative symbol, and the effect display device 9 that variably displays the attractive symbol. The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 recognizes that the operation button 120 has been operated (pressed) based on the input of the detection signal from the operation button 120.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 37 and the ball payout device 97. As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 37 includes a payout control microcomputer 370 including an payout control CPU 371 (an example of an electric component control microcomputer that controls an electrically driven electric component). Has been. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control CPU 371, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control means. That is, the payout control means is realized by a payout control CPU 371, a payout control microcomputer 370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 370.

  The detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The detection signal of the full switch 48 is input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout number count switch 301 is a switch that detects a game ball paid out based on a winning and a game ball paid out based on a ball lending request from the card unit 50, and outputs a detection signal. A detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 295 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout motor 289 is provided in the ball payout device 97 and rotates to pay out payout game balls stored on the back surface of the game machine. The payout motor position sensor 295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. It is done. In the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, the detection signal from the ball break switch 187 indicates that the ball is out of ball, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates that the ball is full. Then, the ball payout process is stopped. Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full tank state, the ball launching from the ball striking device is stopped. Note that even when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full state, the ball firing from the ball striking device may not be stopped. When the signal line from the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to the ball hitting device, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the ball shot from the ball hitting device. Also good.

  When there is a winning game ball at the winning opening, a prize ball number signal (payout number data) indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a prize ball number signal are fetched from the output circuit 67 of the main board 31 as a payout command signal. A prize ball REQ signal (capture request signal) requesting (reception) is output (transmitted). Specifically, it is turned on. The award ball number signal is composed of 4-bit data (binary 4-digit data) and is output through four signal lines. Note that the on state of the signal, that is, the output state is a state where the signal is significant, and turning on means that the signal receiving side is instructed to start some processing based on the signal. To do. For example, when the prize ball number signal indicating the number of prize balls and the prize ball REQ signal are turned on, the microcomputer 370 is commanded to recognize the number of prizes indicated by the prize ball number signal. Means that. Alternatively, the signal may be turned on by outputting a signal, and the signal may be turned off by stopping the signal output. However, a signal corresponding to the on state is output when the signal is turned on, and the signal is output according to the off condition when the signal is turned off. Alternatively, the on state and the off state may be switched by outputting a signal.

  The prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal are input to the I / O port 372e via the input circuit 373A. When the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the prize ball number signal via the I / O port 372e, the payout control microcomputer 370 controls to drive the ball payout device 97 to pay out the number of game balls indicated by the prize ball number signal. The prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal correspond to a payout command signal for designating the number of payouts.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 372c. A detection signal from an error release switch 375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 372f of the payout control board 37. The error cancel switch 375 is used to cancel the error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the payout motor 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 97 via the output port 372a and the relay board 72. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 372a, but is not shown in FIG.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 50 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 50 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 66 is connected to a power display LED 60, a ball lending LED 61, a ball lending switch 62, and a return switch 63 (not shown in FIG. 1) provided in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3. .

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 62 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 63 has been operated are provided to the card unit 50 from the interface board 66 in accordance with the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 50 to the interface board 66. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 372f and the output port 372d. An interface board 66 is interposed between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 as shown in FIG.

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 62 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 63 has been operated are provided to the card unit 50 from the interface board 66 in accordance with the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 50 to the interface board 66. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 372f and the output port 372d. An interface board 66 is interposed between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 as shown in FIG.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 50 and, when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 50, drives the payout motor 289 to give a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 50 to fall. Thereafter, when a BRDY signal from the card unit 50 is not in an ON state, a prize ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control means.

  In this embodiment, the case where the card unit 50 is installed adjacent to the gaming machine as a separate body from the gaming machine is taken as an example, but the card unit 50 may be integrated with the gaming machine. . Further, the present invention can be applied even in the case where game balls corresponding to the amount of money are lent out in accordance with coin insertion.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs signals corresponding to detection signals of the full switch 48, the ball break switch 187, and the payout number count switch 301 to the main board 31 via the output port 372b and the output circuit 373B. However, the detection signals of the full tank switch 48, the ball break switch 187 and the payout count switch 301 that are input to the payout control microcomputer 370 are branched at the payout control board 37, and the branched detection signal is output to the output circuit 373B. Via the main board 31. In such a configuration, the payout control microcomputer 370 need not output from the output port 372b signals corresponding to the detection signals of the full tank switch 48, the ball break switch 187, and the payout number count switch 301.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 controls the display of the first decorative symbol display device 9a and the second decorative symbol display device 9b via the output port 106 based on the effect control command, and also performs a VDP (video display processor) 109. The display control of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 5 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a detection signal from the operation button 120 via the input port, and performs a predetermined game effect based on the input detection signal.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the information terminal board 34. In the example shown in FIG. 6, a signal is input to the information terminal board 34 from the main board 31 via the cable 343 and the connector 341. A signal input via the cable 343 is output to, for example, a hall computer via the driver circuit 345, the connector 347, and the cable 349.

  7 and 8 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of output port assignment in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 7, the output port 0 is an output port for a payout command signal (award ball number signal, award ball REQ signal) and a power supply confirmation signal transmitted to the payout control board 37. The high level “1” of the prize ball number signal corresponds to the ON state, and the high level “1” of the power confirmation signal corresponds to the ON state (a state where power is supplied). Further, the low level “0” of the prize ball REQ signal corresponds to an ON state (a state where a payout request is made).

  From the output port 1, a solenoid (large winning opening door solenoid) 21 for opening and closing a variable winning ball apparatus 20 for opening and closing a large winning opening and a solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid) 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are opened. The drive signal for is output.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the output ports 2 and 3 are output ports for signals output to the information terminal board 34 (via the hall computer). Signals output from the output ports 2 and 3 are input to the information terminal board 34 from the connector 341 shown in FIG. From the output port 2, a start port 1 signal, a symbol determination frequency 2 signal, a symbol determination frequency 1 signal, a big hit 1 signal, a big hit 2 signal, a short time signal, a big hit 4 signal, and a big hit 3 signal are output. The signal output from the output port 2 is a control information signal generated during the execution of the game control process.

  Also, an abnormal signal and a prize ball information signal (also called prize ball signal or payout information) are output from the output port 3. In this embodiment, when an abnormal winning to the big winning opening or the second start winning opening 14 is detected, a magnetic abnormality to the big winning opening is detected, or a vibration abnormal state of the gaming machine is detected. When an abnormal opening of the special winning opening is detected, an abnormal signal is output. The prize ball information signal is a signal input from the payout control board 37 to the main board 31.

  The output ports 1 to 3 are a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, the time when the signal is in the ON state corresponds to the state where the “signal is being output”.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 9, bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0 have a count switch 23, a gate switch 32a, winning port switches 39a, 30a, 29a, 33a, a first start port switch 13a, and a second start port, respectively. A detection signal of the switch 14a is input.

  In addition, a prize ball count signal, a full tank signal, a ball runout signal, and a payout error signal from the payout control board 37 are input to bits 0 to 3 of the input port 1, respectively. The high level “1” of the prize ball count signal corresponds to the on state (the state where the payout number count switch 301 is turned on). The high level “1” of the full tank signal corresponds to the on state (the state in which the full switch 48 is turned on). The high level “1” of the ball-out signal corresponds to the on state (the state in which the ball-out switch 187 is on). A high level “1” of the payout error signal corresponds to an ON state (a state in which a payout error has occurred).

  In addition, a magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor 90 provided at the special winning opening is input to the bit 5 of the input port 1. The high level “1” of the magnetic detection signal corresponds to the ON state (the state in which the magnetic sensor 90 is detected and turned ON). A vibration detection signal from a vibration sensor 91 attached to the gaming machine is input to the bit 6 of the input port 1. A high level “1” of the vibration detection signal corresponds to an on state (a state in which the vibration sensor 91 is turned on after detecting an abnormal vibration state). The bit 7 of the input port 1 is inputted with a big prize opening signal from the opening detection sensor 92 provided at the big prize opening. The high level “1” of the big prize opening signal corresponds to the on state (the state where the open detection sensor 92 is turned on after detecting the open state of the big prize opening).

  Bits 0 and 1 of the input port 2 are supplied with a power-off signal from the power supply board and a clear switch detection signal (clear signal), respectively. The power-off signal is a signal that is output when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in a predetermined voltage. The clear switch is a switch that can be operated by a game clerk or the like, and is a switch that is operated when the RAM 55 is to be initialized. The winning ball BUSY signal from the payout control board 37 is input to bit 2 of the input port 2. The prize ball BUSY signal is a signal that is output when a prize ball is being paid out. The input ports 0 to 2 are a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, the time when the signal is in the ON state corresponds to the state where the “signal is input”.

  Note that logic opposite to the “logic” shown in FIGS. 7 to 9 may be used. For example, an input signal in which 1 is on may be an input signal in which 0 is on. 7 to 9 are ports that can be accessed at one time, that is, ports that can be accessed by the same interrupt.

  FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram showing the internal configuration of the information terminal board. In the information terminal board 34 shown in FIG. 10, the left connector CN corresponds to the connector 341 for connecting the cable 343 for transmitting the signal from the main board 31 shown in FIG. 6, and the right connectors CN1 to CN11 are This corresponds to a connector 347 for connecting a cable 349 for transmitting a signal to the hall computer shown in FIG. The semiconductor relays (PhotoMOS relays) PC1 to PC11 correspond to the driver circuit 345 shown in FIG.

  When the cable 343 from the main board 31 is connected to the connector CN, various signals are input to the information terminal board 34 from the main board 31 (game control microcomputer 560). Specifically, the start port 1 signal is input to the terminal “2” of the connector CN, the symbol determination frequency 2 signal is input to the terminal “3” of the connector CN, and the symbol determination frequency 1 is input to the terminal “4” of the connector CN. A signal is input, a jackpot signal is input to the terminal “5” of the connector CN, a jackpot signal of 2 is input to the terminal “6” of the connector CN, and a time reduction signal is input to the terminal “7” of the connector CN. 4 signals of jackpot are input to terminal “8” of connector CN, 3 signals of jackpot are input to terminal “9” of connector CN, an abnormal signal is input to terminal “10” of connector CN, and terminal “11” of connector CN ”Is input with the prize ball information signal.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the information terminal board 34, the signal line of the reference potential is connected to the terminal “1” of the connector CN, the signal line branches, and the input terminals “1” of the respective semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10. "It is connected to the. The signal lines connected to the terminals “2” to “11” of the connector CN are connected to the input terminals “2” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 via the 1 KΩ resistors R1 to R10, respectively. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “4” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are connected to the terminals “1” of the connectors CN1 to CN10, respectively. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “3” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are connected to the terminals “2” of the connectors CN1 to CN10, respectively.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10, as for the door opening signal, detection signals (door opening signals) from the door opening switches 154 and 155 are input to the information terminal board 34 via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. Is done. And it inputs into the semiconductor relay PC11 mounted in the information terminal board 34. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the reference potential signal line is connected to the input terminal “2” of the semiconductor relay PC11 via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. A ground line is connected to the input terminal “1” of the semiconductor relay PC11 via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. The signal line connected to the output terminal “4” of the semiconductor relay PC11 is connected to the terminal “1” of the connector CN11. The signal line connected to the output terminal “3” of the semiconductor relay PC11 is connected to the terminal “2” of the connector CN11. In this embodiment, the backflow prevention diode 506a is provided on the input side of the reference potential of the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31, so that it is not the semiconductor relay PC11 provided on the information terminal board 34. Thus, the current from the backup power source 505 is prevented from being supplied to each circuit and each circuit element. In this embodiment, expressions such as “door open signals from door open switches 154 and 155 are input” are used. Specifically, as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. When one or both of the opening switches 154 and 155 are turned on (energized), a detection signal from either or both of the door opening switches 154 and 155 passes through the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31. The information is input to the information terminal board 34.

  In the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11, when a signal current flows through the input terminal, a light emitting element (LED) on the input side emits light. The emitted light is applied to the photoelectric element (solar cell) provided opposite to the LED through the transparent silicon. The photoelectric element that has received the light is exchanged for voltage according to the amount of light, and this voltage passes through the control circuit to charge the MOSFET gate of the output section. When the MOSFET gate voltage supplied from the photoelectric element reaches the set voltage value, the MOSFET becomes conductive and turns on the load. When the signal current at the input terminal is cut off, the light emitting element (LED) stops emitting light. When the light emission of the LED stops, the voltage of the photoelectric element decreases, and when the voltage supplied from the photoelectric element decreases, the gate load of the MOSFET is rapidly discharged by the control circuit. With this control circuit, the MOSFET is turned off and the load is turned off.

  By the operation of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 as described above, the signal input from the input side connector CN and the door opening signals from the door opening switches 154 and 155 are transmitted to the output side connectors CN1 to CN11 and are sent to the hall computer. Are output. Specifically, a start port 1 signal is output from the connector CN1, a symbol determination frequency 2 signal is output from the connector CN2, a symbol determination frequency 1 signal is output from the connector CN3, and a jackpot 1 signal is output from the connector CN4. Connector CN5 outputs 2 jackpot signals, Connector CN6 outputs a time reduction signal, Connector CN7 outputs 4 jackpot signals, Connector CN8 outputs 3 jackpot signals, Connector CN9 outputs an abnormal signal, Connector A prize ball information signal is output from CN10, and a door opening signal is output from connector CN11.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, an abnormal winning to the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14, a magnetic abnormality around the big winning opening, an abnormal vibration state of the gaming machine, an abnormal winning prize opening. When opening is detected, an abnormal signal is output using the common connector CN9. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of parts of a mechanism for outputting information to an external device such as a hall computer and complication of wiring work.

  As described above, by providing the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 on the information terminal board 34, signal input from the outside to the inside of the gaming machine can be prevented, and as a result, illegal acts can be reliably prevented. . In the above example, the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 are provided on the information terminal board 34, but other relay elements such as mechanical relays may be used instead of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11.

  In this embodiment, since the door opening signal from the door opening switches 154 and 155 is input to the information terminal board 34 via the backup power supply circuit 506 of the main board 31, the gaming machine is turned off. Even in this case, the power of the backup power supply 505 mounted on the backup power supply circuit 506 is supplied to the door opening switches 154 and 155 and the semiconductor relay PC11 of the information terminal board 34, and the door opening signal is transmitted to the output-side connector 11. Output to the hall computer.

  In this embodiment, the door opening switches 154 and 155 are in an off state (non-energized state) when the door (glass door frame 2 or mechanism plate) or the game frame is not opened, and when opened. It becomes energized and turned on. Therefore, compared with the case where the door opening switches 154 and 155 are configured to be in an on state when the door and the game frame are not opened and to be in an off state when opened, the power consumption is reduced. Can do. The door opening switches 154 and 155 are in an on state (energized state) when the door (glass door frame 2 or mechanism plate) or the game frame is not opened, and are in a non-energized state when the door is opened. You may use what will be in a state.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration in which the open detection sensor 92 installed in the vicinity of the special winning opening detects that the special winning opening has been opened. It is assumed that the open detection sensor 92 includes a light emitting unit 92a and a light receiving unit 92b that is installed in a direction facing the light emitting unit 92a and receives light emitted from the light emitting unit 92a.

  FIG. 11A shows that the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in a closed state. As shown in FIG. 11A, the solenoid arm 21b of the solenoid 21 is stopped at a position where it is pushed away from the main body of the solenoid 21 by the spring 21c. The link 130 that rotates about the shaft 140a has convex portions 130a, 130b, and 130c, and is connected to the solenoid arm 21b at the end of the convex portion 130b. Then, as shown in FIG. 11 (A), the convex portion 20a provided at the end of the door of the special variable winning ball device 20 is formed by a convex portion 130a and a convex portion 130c of the link 130 so that the special variable winning ball device. 20 is locked at a position where it is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, in the closed state of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, the convex portion 130a provided on the link 130 is located between the light emitting portion 92a and the light receiving portion 92b of the opening detection sensor 92. To position. Therefore, the light receiving portion 92b of the open detection sensor 92 cannot receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion 92a. The light receiving unit 92b of the open detection sensor 92 does not output a big prize opening signal when the light emitted from the light emitting unit 92a cannot be received.

  When the solenoid 21 is energized, the solenoid arm 21b coupled to the plunger 21a moves in a direction approaching the main body of the solenoid 21. When the solenoid arm 21b moves in a direction approaching the main body of the solenoid 21, the link 130 connected to the solenoid arm 21b at the end of the convex portion 130b rotates about the shaft 140a, and the convex portion 130a becomes a special variable prize. The special variable winning ball device 20 is rotated about the shaft 140b so as to open the special variable winning ball device 20 by pushing up the convex portion 20a provided at the end of the door of the ball device 20.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the open state of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, the convex portion 130a provided on the link 130 is between the light emitting portion 92a and the light receiving portion 92b of the open detection sensor 92. Without being positioned, the light receiving portion 92b of the open detection sensor 92 can receive light emitted from the light emitting portion 92a. The light receiving unit 92b of the opening detection sensor 92 outputs a big prize opening signal when receiving light emitted from the light emitting unit 92a.

  Note that whether or not the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in an open state may be detected by another method. Specifically, for example, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in an open state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in an open state by a switch installed at a position pressed by one of the convex portions provided on the link 130. It may be detected whether or not. Further, for example, whether or not the special variable winning ball device 20 is in an open state may be detected by a switch installed at a position where the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened by the solenoid arm 21b. . Further, the open detection sensor 92 may be realized by a reflective photosensor. Further, the opening detection sensor 92 may be installed at another position (specifically, for example, the top surface of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20). That is, the opening detection sensor 92 may be installed in any location and type of sensor as long as it can detect that the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is physically opened. In order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the opening detection sensor 92 and damaging the opening detection sensor 92, as illustrated in FIG. 11 in the description of the present embodiment, the opening detection sensor 92 is directly connected to the game. It is preferable to be provided in a place that does not contact the sphere.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. A routine is a group of instructions (codes) for executing a specific process in a program. A procedure in which a series of instructions for performing a certain process is described as a procedure, and a function (function) that is a function that adds a calculation process to given information and returns a result of the process are classified into routines. In particular, even if the program code is not independent, if a certain amount of code is concentrated for a specific process, the part can be regarded as a routine. Routines are broadly divided into two groups depending on their position in the program. These routines are called first when starting a program, and the routine that manages the progress of the entire program is called the "main routine". A routine that operates in this manner is called a “subroutine”.

  When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15, including S44 and S45).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, value of total pending memory counter, value of time reduction counter, etc.), output An area where the output state of the port is stored (output port buffer), a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like.

  Moreover, CPU56 transmits the command regarding a power failure recovery as an initialization command at the time of electric power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. Here, as the commands related to power failure recovery, the power failure recovery specification command for specifying the display of the power failure recovery screen, the game state specification command for power failure specifying the gaming state at the time of power failure, and the total number of pending storage at the time of power failure A command for specifying the total pending storage number to be specified is provided. In addition, instead of transmitting the combined reserved memory number designation command, a command (first reserved memory number designation) that designates the first reserved memory number based on the value of the first reserved memory number counter that counts the first reserved memory number. Command), and a command for specifying the second reserved memory number (second reserved memory number designation command) is transmitted based on the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number. Also good. Further, when the value of the first reserved memory number counter or the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 0, these commands may not be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit type determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, and a payout stop An initial value is set to a flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the prohibition period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of an abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the prohibition period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the effect display device 9.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34. Execute control.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs the process for performing abnormality notification, when various abnormal states are detected (step S23: abnormality notification process). In this embodiment, when it is detected that a game ball has won at the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14 at a time other than the regular time, the abnormal winning is notified. Further, in this embodiment, when a magnetic abnormality is detected at the big prize opening, when an abnormal vibration state of the gaming machine is detected, or when an abnormal open state of the big prize opening is detected, abnormality notification is performed.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining jackpot symbols used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) MR1: Determine the detachment symbol (stop symbol) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for detachment symbol determination)
(2) MR2: Determines the type of jackpot (“normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, “surprise probability”) when generating the jackpot (for determining the jackpot type)
(3) MR3: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the production symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) MR4: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) MR5: Determines the initial value of MR4 (for determining MR4 initial value)

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 13, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number in (2) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol in (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may make it use random numbers other than the random number of said (1)-(5). For example, an MR2 initial value random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot type determining random number may be provided. Then, in addition to the MR4 initial value random number, the MR2 initial value random number may be updated by the initial value random number update processing in steps S18 and S25. By doing so, it is possible to more randomly determine the jackpot type (special jackpot symbol) at the time of determining the jackpot, especially a probability variation symbol (for example, “7”) or a sudden probability variation symbol (for example, “5”). Can be generated more randomly. Therefore, the probability big hit can be generated more randomly, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a random number generated by the hardware (random number circuit 503) built in the game control microcomputer 560. The big hit determination random number is used as the big hit determination random number. Software random numbers generated based on the program may be used. The random number circuit 503 may not be built in the game control microcomputer 560 but may be a circuit different from the game control microcomputer 560 (may be external to the game control microcomputer 560). .

  In this embodiment, the random numbers (particularly MR1, MR2, MR3) shown in FIG. 14 are used for both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation. And the random number related to the variation of the second special symbol may be separated.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to a normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 and the open / close state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56, for example, outputs a signal to the hall computer (specifically, a start port 1 signal output from the output port 2, a symbol determination frequency 2 signal, a symbol determination frequency 1 signal, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal) , A time-short signal, a big hit 4 signal, a big hit 3 signal) are output (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S31). Specifically, the payout control is performed in accordance with winning detection based on any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S32: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in accordance with values of a start flag and a special symbol process flag set in a variation pattern setting process described later. The special symbol display control process set in the output buffer is performed (step S33). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag is set in the special symbol process, the CPU 56 outputs the output every 0.2 seconds. The display control data value set in the buffer is incremented by one. Instead of using the start flag and the end flag, the CPU 56 may update the value of the display control data based on the value of the special symbol process flag. For example, when the value of the special symbol process flag becomes a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (1 in this embodiment), the CPU 56 sets the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the value of the display control data may be incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds until 4). Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  For example, the CPU 56 checks a special symbol pointer to be described later, and performs variable display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b corresponding to the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Run.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Instead of using the start flag and the end flag, the CPU 56 may switch the value of the display control data based on the value of the normal symbol process flag. For example, in the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 confirms the number of passages through the gate based on the value of the normal symbol process flag and determines whether or not the normal symbol is a hit and determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol. Processing, normal symbol variation processing for executing various processing during normal symbol variation, normal symbol stop processing for stopping and displaying the normal symbol, and opening and closing of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) after the normal symbol is hit A normal electric accessory actuating process for performing control is executed. In this case, for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag becomes a value (for example, 1) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process, the value of the normal symbol process flag becomes a value (for example, 2) corresponding to the normal symbol stop process. Until then, the value of the display control data may be incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. The big hit determination table is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with random R (random number for big hit determination) updated within a numerical range of 0 to 65535 are set (FIG. 15A (B)). The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table (see FIG. 15A) used in a normal state or a short time state, and a probable change big hit determination table (see FIG. 15B) used in a probability change state. . The numerical values described in the left column of FIGS. 15A and 15B are the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value. The CPU 56 compares the value of the random R with the jackpot determination value, and determines that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit if the value of the random R matches any one of the jackpot determination values. Further, the CPU 56 compares the random R value with the small hit determination value, and determines that the small hit is made when the random R value matches any of the small hit determination values.

  The jackpot type determination table is assigned to each jackpot type (“normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, “surprise”) compared to the jackpot type determination random number (MR2). This is a table in which determination values are set (FIG. 15C). When it is determined to win the jackpot based on the random R, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determining random number.

  Here, “normal” means a normal big hit (non-probable change big hit) that is generated when a non-probable variation symbol (cass symbol) is derived and displayed when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The “first probability variation” means a probability variation big hit (first probability variation big hit) that occurs when a probability variation symbol is derived and displayed when the symbol variation stops. The “second probability variation” means a probability variation big hit (second probability variation big hit) that is generated when a non-probability variation symbol is temporarily stopped during a symbol variation and then a fluctuating promotion effect is executed. “3rd probability variation” is a non-probability variation symbol derived and displayed when symbol variation is stopped, but a probability variation big hit (third probability variation big hit) that occurs when a big hit promotion promotion effect is executed at a predetermined timing during a big hit game. Means. “Accuracy” means two rounds of sudden and promising big hits.

  The jackpot type and the special jackpot symbol correspond to each other. Specifically, when “normal jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol (determined special symbol) is “3”. When “probability big hit (first probability variation big hit, second probability variation big hit, third probability variation big hit)” is determined as the big hit type, the special symbol stop symbol (determined special symbol) becomes “7”. When “suddenly promising big hit” is determined as the big hit type, the special symbol stop symbol (determined special symbol) is “5”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15C, the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol and the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol are provided separately, and the second special symbol is provided. In the big hit type determination table, no determination value is assigned to the big hit type “surprise”. Therefore, when a big hit has occurred based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the “surprise” is not determined as the big hit type. However, even when a big hit occurs based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize, a determination value may be assigned so that “surprise” is determined as the big hit type. Further, instead of dividing the table for the first special symbol and the table for the second special symbol, the jackpot type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined using one jackpot type determination table. .

  If it is determined to be a small hit based on the random R, the special symbol stop symbol is automatically determined to be “1” (without using the big hit type determining random number). If it is decided to make a deviation based on the random R, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, “9”, “−” are used as the special symbol stop symbols based on the random symbol for determining the loss symbol. "Is determined.

  In addition, as for the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, one of the two LEDs is a big hit symbol / small hit symbol (a common symbol for big hit / small hit), and the other is an off symbol. Further, the stop symbol of the production symbol is a display result for designating the display results (first probability variation big hit, second probability variation big hit, third probability variation big hit, normal big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit, off) determined by the CPU 56. It is determined by the CPU 101 for effect control based on the specific command.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the display result of the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is as follows. Decide on either. The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the big hit determination random value. If it matches, it will be determined as a big hit or a small hit for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern used in this embodiment. In FIG. 16, “EXT” indicates EXT data of the second byte in the effect control command having a two-byte structure. “Time” indicates the variation time of the special symbol (variable display period of identification information).

  In this example, each variation pattern has a variation pattern when the stop symbol of the special symbol (effect symbol) is “out of symbol” and a variation when the stop symbol of the special symbol (effect symbol) is “big hit symbol”. A variation pattern when the stop symbol of the special symbol (directing symbol) is “suddenly probable big hit symbol” and a variation pattern when the stop symbol of the special symbol (directing symbol) is “small hit symbol” Is provided.

  As fluctuation patterns of outliers, fluctuation patterns of normal fluctuations without reach, fluctuation patterns of shortening fluctuations without reach, fluctuation patterns with normal reach (simple reach mode), fluctuation patterns with long reach, and super A variation pattern with reach A, a variation pattern with super reach B, and a variation pattern with super reach C are provided.

  The jackpot variation pattern includes a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern with long reach, a variation pattern with super reach A, a variation pattern with super reach B, a variation pattern with super reach C, and a super reach. A variation pattern with D and a variation pattern with super reach D are provided.

  As a variation pattern for the sudden probability variation big hit, only a variation pattern of a special variation for sudden probability variation is provided. Further, only a special variation pattern for small hits is provided as a small hit dedicated variation pattern.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 17, in this embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by using eight signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal (capture instruction signal) that triggers the capture of the effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means that, for example, each of the first and second bytes of the effect control command data Accordingly, the production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. The effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 19, command 80XX (H) is an effect control that designates a decorative symbol and a variation pattern of the effect symbol that are variably displayed on the ornament symbol display and the effect display device 9 corresponding to the variable symbol display. Command (variation pattern command). “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving any one of the commands 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the decoration symbol display and the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the decoration symbols and the effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are effect control commands that indicate whether a big hit, a small hit or a loss, and a type of big hit game (a type of big hit). The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative design and the production design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H). It is called a command.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a symbol variation designation command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols and effect symbols is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbol and the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result. In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the variation display of the decoration symbol and the production symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and the case where the variation display of the decoration symbol and the production symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are stopped. Although the case where the common symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted is shown, different symbol confirmation designation commands (when the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is terminated ( For example, a first symbol confirmation designation command, a second symbol confirmation designation command) may be transmitted.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) for designating display of an initial screen, which is transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) that designates the display of a power failure recovery screen that is transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Note that the CPU 56 checks a flag (such as a probability change flag or a short time flag) that indicates a gaming state that is backed up when the power is restored from the power failure, and specifies that a different power failure recovery screen is displayed depending on the gaming state. A recovery designation command may be transmitted. Specifically, the command 9200 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state when recovering from a power failure is a normal state, and the command 9201 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state when recovering from a power failure is a probable state. The command 9202 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state when the power is restored from the power failure is in the short time state, and the command 9203 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state is restored in the chance mode after the power failure. May be. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 displays a different power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 9 according to the gaming state based on the power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 56.

  Command 93XX (H) is a power failure gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state when a power failure occurs. The CPU 56 confirms a flag (such as a probability change flag or a short time flag) that indicates a gaming state that is backed up when the power is restored from the power failure, and transmits a gaming state designation command during a power failure according to the gaming state. In XX, a value corresponding to the gaming state is set. Specifically, the command 9300 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state when recovering from a power failure is a normal state, and the command 9301 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state when recovering from a power failure is a probable state. If the gaming state at the time of recovery from a power failure is a short-time state, command 9302 (H) is transmitted. If the gaming state at the time of recovery from a power failure is the chance mode state, command 9303 (H) is transmitted. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 displays a background (background image, background color, etc.) corresponding to the game state on the effect display device 9 based on the game state designation command at the time of power failure from the CPU 56.

  Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is a probability change state. Command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is the time-short state. Command 9503 (H) is an effect control command (chance mode state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is the chance mode state. Commands 9500 (H) to 9503 (H) are referred to as background designation commands.

  When the CPU 56 does not manage whether or not it is in the chance mode state, the CPU 56 does not need to transmit a chance mode state background designation command (9503 (H)) indicating that the gaming state is the chance mode state. .

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20, the commands A001 to A004 (H) display a fanfare screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the start of a big hit game (or a small hit game) (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) It is. The jackpot start designation commands include jackpot start 1 designation to jackpot start 4 designation commands depending on the type of jackpot. Of these, the big hit start 1 designation command A001 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a normal big hit (non-probability variable big hit) game. The big hit start 2 designation command A002 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a small hit game. The big hit start 3 designation command A003 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a probable big hit game. The big hit start 4 designation command A004 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a sudden probability change big hit (two round big hit) game.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the non-probability variable big hit end screen, that is, specifying the end of the big hit game, and specifying that it is a non-probable variable big hit (normal big hit) (a big hit end 1 designation command) : Ending 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) displays a probability variation jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the end of jackpot game and designating that the probability variation jackpot has been reached (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command) It is. Command A303 (H) displays an abrupt probability change jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command (designating ending 3 designation command: ending 3 designation) designating the end of jackpot game and designating that sudden probability change jackpot Command). In this embodiment, the effect control command for displaying the small hit end screen, that is, the end of the small hit game is not provided, but such a command may be provided.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. In this embodiment, the total pending storage number designation command command C2XX (H) is transmitted not only during the execution of the game control but also when the power failure is restored (see step S43). The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending storage number subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending storage number, but does not use the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending storage number subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be specified by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification designating command) for instructing that an abnormal winning at the special winning opening has occurred. Command D002 (H) is an effect control command (starting abnormal winning notification designation command) for instructing that an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. Command D003 (H) is an effect control command (magnetic abnormality notification designation command) for instructing that abnormal magnetism has been detected in the vicinity of the special winning opening. Command D004 (H) is an effect control command (vibration abnormality notification designation command) that instructs to notify that abnormal vibration is detected in the gaming machine. Command D005 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal opening notification designation command) for instructing notification that abnormal opening of the special winning opening has been detected.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. To do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, the variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are commonly used for variable display of identification information on the first decorative symbol display 9a and variable display of identification information on the second decorative symbol display 9b. When the presentation control microcomputer 100 is configured to control the first decoration design display 9a and the second decoration design display 9b, the game control microcomputer 560 can control the production control microcomputer. The types of commands transmitted to 100 can be prevented from increasing. In addition, when controlling the effect parts such as the effect display device 9 that produces effects in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits to the effect control microcomputer 100. It is possible to avoid increasing the types of commands that are executed.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the transmission timing of the effect control command. FIG. 21A shows an example when a start prize (first start prize or second start prize) occurs. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first start prize designation command (or the second start prize designation command), and then continuously transmits the total pending storage number designation command. Specifically, a first start winning designation command (or second start winning designation command) is transmitted in a game control process based on a timer interrupt, and then a combined pending storage number designation command is transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, the game control microcomputer 560 receives a background designation command, a fluctuation pattern command, a symbol fluctuation designation command, a display result specifying command, and a total pending storage number subtraction designation command at the start of fluctuation. Send. When the variable display time has elapsed, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted.

  The order in which these commands are transmitted is not limited to the order shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, and can be changed as appropriate.

  22 and 23 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the power-off process in step S20. In the power-off process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first checks whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in an on state) (step S450). If not on, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM 55 is cleared to 0 (step S451). If it is on, the value of the backup monitoring timer is incremented by 1 (step S452).

  Next, when the value of the backup monitoring timer coincides with a determination value (for example, 2) (step S453), the CPU 56 clears the winning cumulative number counter (step S453A). The cumulative number-of-wins counter is a counter for counting the cumulative number of game balls that have won the big prize opening when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in a state other than the open state. In this embodiment, the winning cumulative number counter is used when determining an abnormal winning to the big winning opening as will be described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 clears the start winning cumulative number counter (step S453B). The start winning cumulative number counter is a counter for counting the cumulative number of game balls won in the second starting winning opening 14 when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in a state other than the open state. In this embodiment, the start winning cumulative number counter is used when determining an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14, as will be described later. In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the second start winning port 14 being in the open state) means that the variable winning ball device 15 is physically open. And a state from when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is physically closed until a predetermined interval period (for example, 1 second) elapses.

  Next, if the abnormal winning detection flag indicating that the abnormal winning at the big winning opening is detected or the abnormal starting winning detection flag indicating that the abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening is detected, the CPU 56 is set. These flags are reset (step S453C).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes power supply stop processing after step S454, that is, preparation processing for stopping power supply. That is, the state shifts from the state in which the progress of the game is controlled to the state in which the power supply stop process (the power-off control process) for saving the game state is executed. Note that “formed in the RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  By using the backup monitoring timer and the determination value, if the power-off signal is kept on for a time corresponding to the determination value, the power supply stop process is started. That is, even when the power-off signal is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like, the power supply stop process is not erroneously started. Note that the value of the backup monitoring timer is stored by the backup power source for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Therefore, in step S7 in the main process, it can be confirmed that the processing result of the power supply stop process is stored because the value of the backup monitoring timer is the same as the determination value.

  In the power supply stop process, the CPU 56 creates parity data (steps S454 to S463). That is, first, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area (step S454), and the checksum calculation start address corresponding to the start address of the RAM area in which the contents are to be stored even when power supply is stopped is set in the pointer. (Step S455). Further, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the final address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set (step S456).

  Next, an exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated (step S457). The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area (step S458), the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S459), and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1 (step S460). Then, the processes in steps S457 to S460 are repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0 (step S461).

  When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area (step S462). Then, the inverted data is stored in the checksum data area (step S463). This data becomes parity data to be checked when the power is turned on. Next, an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (step S471). Thereafter, the built-in RAM 55 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the port clear setting table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S472). In the port clear setting table, the number of processes (the number of output ports to be cleared) is set to the head address, and then the output port address and output value data (clear data: the value of the off state of each bit of the output port) However, the output ports for the number of processes are sequentially set.

  The CPU 56 loads data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the number of processes) (step S473). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S474), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the address of the output port) is loaded (step S475). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S476), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, output value data) is loaded (step S477). Then, the output value data is output to the output port (step S478). Thereafter, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S479), and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S474 (step S480). If the number of processes is 0, that is, if all the output ports to be cleared are cleared, the timer interrupt is stopped (step S481) and the loop process is started.

  When the power supply is stopped by the above processing, the power supply stop processing in steps S454 to S481 is executed, and data indicating that the power supply stop processing has been executed (backup monitoring having a determination value). Timer and checksum) are stored in the backup RAM, RAM access is disabled, the output port is cleared, and timer interrupt for executing the game control process is set to disabled.

  In addition, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (when it is confirmed that the power-off confirmation signal is in the on state), the CPU 56 clears the winning prize accumulation counter and the starting prize accumulation counter. Therefore, it is possible not to accumulate the number of winnings over a long period of time more than necessary, and to reliably detect an abnormality in winning due to an illegal act on the large winning opening and the second starting winning opening 14. In addition, the cumulative number of winnings can be cleared by turning off the power of the gaming machine, and the abnormality notification can be easily reset.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a program for the special symbol process (step S27) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the special winning opening is executed.

  In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects the first starting port switch 13a or the second starting winning port 14 (see FIG. 1) for detecting that a game ball has won the first starting winning port 13 (see FIG. 1). If the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won is turned on, that is, if the first start winning or the second start winning has occurred, the start opening switch passing process is executed. Specifically, the data in the switch-on buffer is read and loaded into a predetermined area of the register or RAM 55, for example (step S321). Then, the bitwise AND operation of the loaded contents (loaded data) and C0 (H) is performed, and if the operation result is not 0 (step S322), the start port switch passing process is executed (step S1323). . Then, any one of steps S300 to S311 is performed. C0 (H) is a value corresponding to the input bits of the detection signals from the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a of the switch-on buffer.

  In this embodiment, the case where the contents of the switch-on buffer in which the contents of the input port 0 are set in the switch process (step S21) is shown. However, the contents of the input port 0 are directly loaded. Also good. In order to prevent erroneous determination due to noise, a flag to be switched on when the content of the input port 0 is set over a plurality of timer interrupts in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 is set. Sometimes, the start port switch passing process may be executed. In addition, the process of step S322 may be replaced with an operation that performs exclusive OR with 00 (H) after masking bits 0 to 5 of the loaded contents (loaded data) (set to 0). .

  Thereafter, any one of steps S300 to S311 is executed. The processes in steps S300 to S311 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of special symbols can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), a special symbol is displayed by the timer (stop time timer). A time (symbol stop time) for stopping the stop symbol is set, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, if the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the grand prize opening, and to send the presentation control command for the round display during the big hit gaming state to the presentation control microcomputer 100. Perform the process. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) according to step S306. The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Specifically, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition for the big prize opening and a process for sending an effect control command for displaying an interval during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100 are performed. Further, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, the control for closing the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special variable winning ball apparatus to close the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the post-opening process for the special winning opening is set by the process timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Post-winner opening process (step S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Processing such as checking whether there is a remaining round in the big hit gaming state is performed. If there is still a remaining round, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) according to step S308.

  Big hit end process (step S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)). It should be noted that although the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, the pre-opening process for small hits is also a process for starting a small hit game when starting the first round.

  Small hit release process (step S310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S311 (in this example, 11 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end processing (step S311): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 11. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 are flowcharts showing the start port switch passing process in step S323. As shown in step S322, when the logical product operation of the contents loaded from the switch-on buffer (the loaded data) and C0 (H) is performed and the operation result is not 0, that is, the first start switch 13a and the first switch In the start port switch passing process that is executed when at least one of the two start port switches 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the bit 7 of the loaded data is 1 (step S210). . In this embodiment, when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the value 1 is stored in bit 7 of the switch-on buffer in step S338 of the switch process described later. In step S210, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value stored in bit 7 of the switch-on buffer is 1.

  Also, if bit 7 of the loaded data is not 1, it means that bit 6 of input port 0 has changed from 0 to 1. That is, it means that the first start port switch 13a is turned on.

  If bit 7 of the switch-on buffer is not 1, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the start port pointer (step S211). Further, when bit 7 of the switch-on buffer is 1, that is, when a start winning in which a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 has occurred (Y in step S210), the normal symbol process flag It is confirmed whether the value of is 3 (step S212).

  Here, the value of the normal symbol process flag being 3 means that, as will be described later, the normal electric accessory actuating process (FIG. 43) in the normal symbol process (step S28) is executed, and the variable winning ball apparatus ( This means that the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory) 15 is being performed. When the opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is being performed (Y in step S212), a winning to the second starting winning opening 14 may occur, and therefore data indicating “second” is set in the starting opening pointer. (Step S213), and the processing after Step S214A is executed. On the other hand, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3, that is, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not being opened / closed, the fact that the second starter switch 14a is turned on is an illegal action (for example, normal Although the symbol is not a winning symbol, there is a high possibility that an abnormal winning based on the act of opening the variable winning ball device 15 and winning the game ball to the second start winning port 14) has occurred. Therefore, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S212), the process proceeds to step S222 without executing the process in step S214A, and the second start winning itself is invalidated. Thereby, even if it is a case where the winning to the 2nd start winning opening 14 was generated by the fraudulent act, it can be surely prevented that the big hit is generated based on the winning.

  Note that the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 based on the value of the normal symbol process flag. When the variable winning ball device 15 is not opened (that is, when the variable winning ball device 15 repeats the opening / closing operation based on the opening pattern according to the game state in the ordinary electric accessory operating process shown in FIG. 43). When it is detected that the second start port switch 14a is turned on (when the ball device 15 is in the closed state), the prize ball payout based on the second start port switch 14a being turned on may not be executed. . However, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the normal symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. For example, if the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened or closed a plurality of times, whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is actually controlled to open is determined whether an abnormal winning has occurred. If the determination is NO, the processing becomes complicated, but the processing can be simplified by determining based on the normal symbol process flag.

  Further, in this embodiment, a reserved memory number counter (first reserved memory number counter) that counts the first reserved memory number (the number of effective winning balls entered the first start winning opening 13), and the second reserved memory number. There is provided a reserved memory number counter (second reserved memory number counter) for counting (the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14). The start port pointer is set with data indicating the address of the first reserved memory number counter or the address of the second reserved memory number counter. That is, the data indicating “first” set in the start port pointer indicates the address of the first reserved memory number counter, and the data indicating “second” indicates the address of the second reserved memory number counter. The start port pointer is formed in the RAM 55. A first reserved memory number counter and a second reserved memory number counter are also formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. Instead of the start port pointer, data indicating “first” or “second” may be set in a register inside the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the start port pointer is 4 (step S214A). If the value of the pending storage number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S221. If the value of the reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer by 1 (step S214B). Specifically, when the starting port pointer indicates “first”, the value of the first reserved memory number counter indicating the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, and the starting port pointer indicates “second”. If it is, the value of the second reserved memory number counter indicating the second reserved memory number is incremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (step S215).

  Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicated by the start port pointer is set in the area (step S216). Specifically, when the start port pointer indicates “first”, data indicating “first” is set, and when the start port pointer indicates “second”, “second” is set. Set the data indicating. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage (when neither “first” data nor “second” data is set), the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) is stored. Is set to 00 (H). In the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), data corresponding to the data (address data) indicated by the start port pointer may be set in an area corresponding to the value of the combined reserved storage number counter. . For example, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data corresponding to the data indicating “first” when the start port pointer indicates “first”. When the start port pointer indicates “second”, 02 (H) is set as data corresponding to the data indicating “second”.

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 27 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 27A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 27 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. 2. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the starting winning port 14. Therefore, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, if there is at least one second reserved memory, regardless of the presence or absence of the first reserved memory Since the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed, and control is performed so that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed only when there is no second reserved memory and there is only the first reserved memory. As long as the winning order of the winning opening 13 alone and the winning order of the second starting winning opening 14 can be specified, it is not always necessary to specify the winning order to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. For this reason, when the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed with priority, the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area) may not be provided.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 27B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  The CPU 56 extracts a software random number (a counter value for generating a big hit type determination random number, etc.) and a random R (a big hit determination random number), and uses them as an extracted random number value as the first reserved storage buffer. And the process of storing in the storage area in the holding storage buffer indicated by the start port pointer of the second holding storage buffer (step S217). Specifically, when the start port pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the software random number and random R in the storage area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved memory number counter of the first reserved memory buffer. When the start port pointer indicates “second”, the software random number and random R are stored in the storage area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved memory number counter of the second reserved memory buffer.

  In the first reserved memory number buffer, each storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number is a continuous address area. In the second reserved memory number buffer, each save area corresponds to the second reserved memory number. The storage area is a continuous address area. In this case, the CPU 56 recognizes the head address of the reserved memory number buffer (the first reserved memory number buffer or the second reserved memory number buffer) based on the data indicated by the start port pointer. Then, the software random number and the random R are stored in the storage area using a value obtained by multiplying the number of data per one hold memory (the number of each random number) by the hold memory number (value indicated by the hold memory number counter) as an offset value.

  In step S217, the CPU 56 extracts the values of MR1 to MR4 as software random numbers and reads the count value of the random number circuit 503 to extract the random R. In addition, each of the first to eighth areas in the reserved specific area illustrated in FIG. 27A further includes two storage areas for storing the extracted random number values (a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory and A storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage) may be formed. In the case of such a configuration, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter in the process of step S217, and the area (first through first) in the pending specific area corresponding to the count value (total pending storage number). In any one of the eighth areas), the random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the start winning port identified as having been won (corresponding to the data of the start port pointer). Alternatively, without providing a total pending storage number counter, each time the process of step S217 is executed, the value of the first pending storage number counter and the value of the second pending storage number counter are added, and the pending specification corresponding to the total value is added. In the area (any one of the first to eighth areas) in the area, the random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the start winning opening identified as having won. In the configuration in which the total pending storage number counter is provided, it is not necessary to perform processing (arithmetic processing) for adding the value of the first pending storage number counter and the value of the second pending storage number counter, and the number of processes can be reduced. In the configuration in which the memory number counter is not provided, the capacity of the RAM 55 can be reduced.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the start winning designation command indicated by the start port pointer (step S218). Specifically, when the starting port pointer indicates “first”, a first starting winning designation command is transmitted, and when the starting port pointer indicates “second”, the second starting winning specification is specified. Send a command. Also, a total pending storage number designation command is transmitted (step S219). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start prize designation command or the second start prize designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S29). Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is set in the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command.

  In step S219, the total reserved memory number designation command is configured to be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the reserved memory number indicated by the start port pointer is indicated. A pending storage number designation command may be transmitted. Further, only the start winning designation command may be transmitted in step S218, and the total pending storage number designation command may not be transmitted in step S219.

  In addition, when the start port pointer indicates “second” (Y in step S221), or when the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S212), the CPU 56 sets the bit of the loaded data. It is confirmed whether 6 is 1 (step S222). If bit 6 of the loaded data is 1, data indicating “first” is set in the start pointer (step S223), and the process proceeds to step S214A. When both the bits 6 and 7 of the loaded data are 1 by the processing of steps S221 to S223, that is, when both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on. After the processing of steps S214A to S219 is executed for the second start port switch 14a corresponding to bit 7, the processing of steps S214A to S219 is executed for the first start port switch 13a corresponding to bit 6. Will be.

  In this embodiment, when both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on, both switches are turned on by the process executed within 2 ms. A process based on this is executed. Within 2 ms (within 1 timer interrupt process), the processing of steps S214A to S219 based on both switches being turned on is completed, so the random number is extracted before the software random number increases by one. . Therefore, an accurate software random number value corresponding to the winning timing can be extracted.

  When the start port pointer does not indicate “second” (N in step S221), or when the start port pointer indicates “second” but bit 6 of the loaded data is not 1 (N in step S222) ), The process proceeds to step S231.

  In step S231, it is confirmed whether both bit 6 and bit 7 of the loaded data are 1. If bit 6 and bit 7 of the loaded data are both 1, the start port pointer is cleared (step S239), and the process ends. That is, when both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are in the on state, the processes after step S232 are not executed. That is, the fact that both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are in the on state means that in the specifying process (the process for specifying which start winning port 13, 14 has been won). Since a situation in which an erroneous determination has been made does not occur, the confirmation processing (steps S232 to S238) for confirming whether the result of the specific processing and the state of the detection signal input to the input port match is performed. Then, the start port pointer is cleared and the process is terminated.

  When both the bit 6 and the bit 7 of the loaded data are not 1 (when only one of the bits 6 and 7 is 1), the CPU 56 indicates that the start pointer indicates “second”. It is confirmed whether or not (step S232). When the start port pointer indicates “second”, it is confirmed whether or not the bit 7 of the switch-on buffer to which the detection signal of the second start port switch 14a is input is 1 (step S233). In the processing of steps S210 and S213, when bit 7 of the switch-on buffer is 1, “second” is set in the start pointer. Therefore, when the start pointer indicates “second”, bit 7 of the switch-on buffer should be “1”. If bit 7 of the switch-on buffer is 1, it is determined that the input detection of the input port is normal, and the process proceeds to step S239.

  If bit 7 of the switch-on buffer is not 1, it is inconsistent with the determination result in step S210. Therefore, in order to execute the determination process in step S210 again, the start port pointer is cleared (step S237). The switch-on buffer data is read (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S210. Note that the value of the second reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 in step S214B, and the value of the total pending memory number counter is incremented by 1 in step S219. That is, the value of the second reserved memory number counter and the value of the total reserved memory number counter are set to -1 (step S234).

  When the start port pointer does not indicate “second”, that is, when it indicates “first”, bit 6 of the switch-on buffer to which the detection signal of the first start port switch 13a is input is 1. Whether or not (step S235). In the processing of steps S210 and S211, when the bit 6 of the switch-on buffer is 1, “first” is set to the start port pointer. Therefore, when the start pointer indicates “first”, bit 6 of the switch-on buffer should be “1”. If bit 6 of the switch-on buffer is 1, it is determined that the input detection of the input port is normal, and the process proceeds to step S239.

  If bit 6 of the switch-on buffer is not 1, it is inconsistent with the determination result in step S210. Therefore, in order to re-execute the determination process in step S210, the processes in steps S237 and S238 are executed again. The process proceeds to step S210. Note that the value of the first reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 in step S214B, and the value of the total pending memory number counter is incremented by +1 in step S219, so that the value is incremented to +1. That is, the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the total reserved memory number counter are set to -1 (step S236).

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a winning process has occurred for a specific process based on the contents of the switch-on buffer (that is, the detection signal input to the input port 0). After executing the specifying process, when the result of the specifying process and the state of the detection signal input to the input port do not match, the specifying process is executed again. It is reliably determined whether it has occurred or whether a winning at the second start port 14 has occurred. For example, if a winning is made to the first starting port 13 when the first reserved memory number is the upper limit of 4, the winning is not considered as a valid starting winning, but the first starting When it is determined that the winning at the mouth 13 is erroneously the winning at the second starting port 14, the value of the second reserved memory number is increased (when the second reserved memory number is not 4 which is the upper limit value). ). In other words, although it should not be a valid start prize, it will be a valid start prize. In this embodiment, the possibility of such a situation is reduced.

  However, the specific process may not be configured to be executed again. In such a configuration, the processes in steps S231 to S238 may not be executed. In this case, the program capacity is reduced as compared with the case where the specific process is executed again. In the case where the specific process is not executed again, the program is configured to shift to step S239 instead of the process to shift to step S231 in FIG.

  In addition, in order to prevent a situation where the specific process is repeatedly executed indefinitely, after the specific process is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the process of steps S231 to S238 is not executed, and the reserved storage specifying information The data stored in the storage area or the random number value stored in the reserved storage number buffer may be cleared, and the start port switch passing process may be terminated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific process is repeatedly executed indefinitely due to the influence of noise or the like and the gaming machine does not operate.

  Further, the specific process may not be executed again after the processes of steps S231 to S238 are executed. In that case, when the process of step S238 is executed, the start port switch passing process is terminated. Note that the contents of the storage area corresponding to the value of the pending storage number counter before being subtracted in the processes of steps S234 and S236 are the random numbers newly extracted when the processes of steps S214B and S216 are subsequently executed. However, when the process of step S238 is executed to finish the start port switch passing process (the same applies to the case where the process of step S238 is executed and the process proceeds to step S210 as in this embodiment). As a precaution, the contents of the storage area corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter before being subtracted in the processing of steps S234 and S236 may be cleared.

  In addition, when the process after step S210 is performed again, if the process of step S218, S219 is performed again, a start winning designation | designated designation | designated command and a total pending | holding storage number designation | designated command will be transmitted twice. In order to avoid such a situation, when it is determined with certainty whether a winning at the first starting port 13 or a winning at the second starting port 14 has occurred (that is, at step S233). When determined as Y or when determined as Y in step S235), the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the subroutine of step S323 is executed after the processes of steps S321 and S322. However, the subroutine of step S323 is not executed, and the processes of steps S321 and S322 are continued. The process of steps S210 to S239 may be executed in the special symbol process when it is determined that N (that is, there is a start prize) in step S322.

  In the start port switch passing process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning port 13 or the process for the second start winning port 14 is executed. Data indicating “second” is set in the start port pointer. In the subsequent processing, processing corresponding to the data set in the start port pointer is executed. For example, taking the process of step S214B as an example, specifically, the first reserved memory number counter and the second reserved memory number counter are formed at consecutive addresses in the RAM 55, and the first at the beginning of the process of step S214B. The address of the reserved memory number counter is set in the register, and the value set in the start port pointer in the register (for example, the data indicating “first” is “0” and the data indicating “second” is “1”). ”) Is added, the value of the register after the addition is used as the address of the RAM 55, and 1 is added to the data at that address. According to such processing, the target of the addition processing is the first reserved memory number counter when the data indicating “first” is set in the start port pointer, and indicates “second” in the start port pointer. When data is set, it is a second reserved memory number counter. That is, in one addition process, the value of the reserved memory number counter corresponding to the start winning opening that is turned on is automatically incremented by one. In other words, the processing for both start winning awards is made common.

  In addition, although the process of step S214B was taken as an example here, the process can be shared for the processes of step S216 and step S218. For example, data corresponding to the first start winning prize (address of the first reserved storage number buffer or command transmission table address of the first start winning designation command) is set in the register, and the start pointer is set in the register. By adding the value as an offset and setting the data based on the value of the register after the addition (in the case of step S216) and specifying the address of the command transmission table (in the case of step S218), one process , Data setting processing and command transmission table address designation can be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number buffer and the second reserved memory number buffer are separately provided is described as an example, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are common. A reserved storage number buffer may be provided. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a common reserved memory number buffer provided in common for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. As shown in FIG. 28, the common reserved storage number buffer includes eight areas obtained by combining a reserved storage specifying information storage area and a random value storage area. In the common reserved storage number buffer, consecutive addresses are assigned to the reserved storage specific information storage area and the random value storage area.

  When the common reserved memory number buffer is used, the CPU 56 increments the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer by 1 in step S214B, increments the value of the total reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S215, and then proceeds to step S216. Instead of the above process, a process of setting the data indicated by the start port pointer in the reserved storage specifying information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer is executed. Specifically, the CPU 56 determines the position of the pointer that specifies the address of the data storage destination based on the total number of reserved memories (which may be obtained by adding the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number each time). By updating, data is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer.

  When specifying the head of the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer, for example, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data stored in the common reserved memory number buffer per one reserved memory (that is, the A value obtained by adding one storage specific information storage area) is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 28, two data storage areas, a reserved storage specific information storage area and a random value storage area, are provided for each reserved storage in the common reserved storage number buffer. Therefore, a value obtained by adding 1 (that is, one reserved storage specific information storage area) to the value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved storage is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, when the total number of pending storages is 3, as shown in FIG. 28, the pending storage specific information storage area corresponding to the offset value + 7 (a value obtained by doubling the total pending storage number 3 and adding 1). Set the data to. In this case, when the start port pointer indicates “first”, data indicating “first” is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area, and when the start port pointer indicates “second”. Sets data indicating “second” in the reserved storage specific information storage area. For example, in the common reserved storage number buffer, there are a total of three reserved storage specific information storage areas per reserved storage and two random value storage areas (for example, for jackpot type determination random numbers and jackpot determination random numbers). When a data storage area is provided, a value obtained by adding 1 (that is, one area of the reserved storage specific information storage area) to the value obtained by multiplying the total number of the reserved storage by 3 is obtained as an address offset value. The pointer may be updated according to the offset value.

  Further, when the initial position of the pointer for designating the data storage destination address is the first area of the common reserved memory number buffer (the reserved storage specific information storage area for the reserved storage 1 shown in FIG. 28), the CPU 56 May be obtained as an offset value of an address by multiplying the total number of pending storages by the number of data stored in the common pending storage number buffer for one pending storage. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 28, a value obtained by doubling the total pending storage number may be obtained as the address offset value. Then, the CPU 56 may perform control so that the pointer is updated by setting the position of the pointer to the position moved by the offset value from the initial position. For example, in the common reserved storage number buffer, there are a total of three reserved storage specific information storage areas per reserved storage and two random value storage areas (for example, for jackpot type determination random numbers and jackpot determination random numbers). When a data storage area is provided, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of pending storages by three may be obtained as an address offset value.

  Further, instead of the process of step S217, the CPU 56 extracts software random numbers (counter values for generating big hit determination random numbers, etc.) and random R (big hit determination random numbers), and extracts them. A process of storing as a random value in a random value storage area at the head of an empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer is executed. Specifically, after setting the data in the reserved storage specific information storage area, the CPU 56 updates the position of the pointer that designates the address by one, and stores the random value in the random value storage area at the address pointed to by the updated pointer. Is stored. Note that the CPU 56 may perform the same processing for the number of types of random number values to be stored.

  29 and 30 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 can start the variation of the special symbol (when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 (specifically “0”), that is, When the special symbol display is not displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, and neither the big hit game nor the small hit is made (step S51), the total number of pending storage is confirmed (step S52). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed.

  If the total reserved memory number is not “0”, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number (step S53A). Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not both the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the second reserved memory number counter are 1 or more. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the stored number counter is larger than the value of the first reserved stored number counter. If the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S53E. If the second reserved memory number is not larger than the first reserved memory number, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number (step S53B). Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not both the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the second reserved memory number counter are 1 or more. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the stored number counter is larger than the value of the second reserved stored number counter. If the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S53D.

  In steps S53A and S53B, when either the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 displays a special symbol variable display corresponding to the non-zero reserved memory number. Control to run. For example, if the first reserved memory number is 1 or more and the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 controls to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more and the first reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 controls to execute the variable display of the second special symbol.

  If the first reserved memory number is not larger than the second reserved memory number (that is, if the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are equal), the CPU 56 determines the reserved specific area (see FIG. 27A). It is confirmed whether or not the first data among the data set to “1” is data indicating “first” (step S53C).

  When the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number (Y in Step S53B), or when the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in Step S53C) ), The CPU 56 stores data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Set (step S53D).

  When the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number (Y in step S53A), or the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, “second”). CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the special symbol pointer (step S53E).

  As described above, by executing the processing of steps S53A to S53E, the CPU 56 gives priority to the variable display of the second special symbol when the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number. Control is performed so as to execute variable display of one special symbol. Further, when the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the CPU 56 performs control so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. As described above, by controlling so that the variation display of the special symbol having the larger number of reserved memories is executed with priority, the situation where an invalid start winning is generated is reduced.

  Note that, for example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first start winning opening 13 is easy to start winning, and when the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state, the second starting winning opening 14 is configured to easily start winning. If it is determined that the total number of reserved memories is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state or the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state is set. May be. If the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is set, the process may proceed to step S53E on condition that the second reserved memory number is not 0, and the second special symbol variation display may be preferentially executed. . If the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are not set, the process may proceed to step S53D on the condition that the first reserved memory number is not 0, and the first special symbol variation display may be preferentially executed. . By doing so, it is possible to preferentially execute the change display of the special symbol that tends to accumulate the reserved memory according to the gaming state, and it is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start winning occurs.

  Further, for example, the variable display of the second special symbol may always be executed on condition that the second reserved memory number is not 0, or the first special is always provided on condition that the first reserved memory number is not 0. You may make it perform the fluctuation | variation display of a symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition to storing (step S54), the value of the reserved memory number (the value of the reserved memory number counter (the value of the first reserved memory number counter or the second reserved memory number counter) indicated by the special symbol pointer) is decreased by 1 and each saved The contents of the area are shifted (step S55), that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) indicated by the special symbol pointer = n (n = 2, 3, 4). Are stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) indicated by the special symbol pointer = n−1. The value of the retained memory number counter is decreased by 1 (step S56) Note that, as described above, in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number (total reserved memory number), the "first start prize" or "second start prize" The CPU 56 saves (stores) data indicating “the first start winning” based on the data indicating “the first starting winning” or “the second starting winning”. It is possible to recognize whether the change is based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the “second start prize”.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the current gaming state (whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state, a probable change state or a short time state, or has been shifted to a chance mode, etc.), and transmits a background designation command corresponding to the gaming state. The control to perform is executed (step S57).

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (step S62). The big hit judgment module compares the big hit judgment value (see Fig. 15) determined in advance with the big hit judgment random number, and if they match, the big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit) or small hit This is a program for executing the process to be determined.

  When the gaming state is a probable change state, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value is set as shown in FIG. In the non-probable change state), the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value as shown in FIG. 15A is set is used.

  When it is determined to be a big hit (step S63), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but in the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or in the second special symbol display 8b. It is also determined whether or not the stop symbol is a big hit symbol.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the big hit type determination random number is read from the random number buffer area (step S72), and based on the big hit type determination random number, using the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. (Probability change "," second probability change "," third probability change "," surprising accuracy ") are determined (step S73). The jackpot type determination table is divided into a table for the first special symbol and a table for the second special symbol, so that the CPU 56 indicates that the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “ It is confirmed whether it is “first” or “second”, and a table for determining the jackpot type is selected.

  Next, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined, the CPU 56 determines the probability variation jackpot flag (“first probability variation”) according to the probability variation jackpot type (“first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”). "Big hit flag", "Second positive variation big hit flag", "Third positive change big hit flag") are set (steps S74 and S75). Further, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probability variation symbol (“7”) (step S76). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S86).

  On the other hand, when the sudden probability change big hit is determined, the CPU 56 sets the sudden probability change big hit flag (steps S77 and S78). Further, the stop symbol of the special symbol is suddenly determined to be a probable variation symbol (“5”) (step S79). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S86).

  Further, when the sudden probability variation big hit is not determined (that is, when it is determined to be the normal big hit), the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol as the non-probable variation symbol (“3”) ( Step S80). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S86).

  If it is determined not to be a big hit (N in step S63), if it is determined to be a small hit, the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag (steps S81 and S82). Further, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be the small hit symbol (“1”) (step S83). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S86).

  When not making a small hit (N in step S81), the CPU 56 reads out the design random number for losing design from the random number buffer area (step S84), and determines the stop design based on the random design design random number (step S85). . In this case, the off symbol (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, “9”, “−”) is determined. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S86).

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit based on a big hit determination random number, and when it is decided to make a big hit, a predetermined big hit type based on the big hit type determining random number (ie, Non-probable big hit, 1st probable big hit, 2nd probable big hit, 3rd probable big hit, and sudden probable big hit type) are determined. May be determined.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). At this time, if the big hit flag is set (Y in step S91), the big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the big hit type is set as the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step S92). The big hit variation pattern judgment table includes 15 round big hit tables when “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and two rounds when “sudden probable big hit” is determined as the big hit type. A jackpot table is provided.

  Note that the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 8 to 14 shown in FIG. 16 are set in the 15 round big hit table. Further, only the variation pattern of variation number 15 shown in FIG. 16 is set in the 2-round probability variation big hit table.

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S91 (N in step S91), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). At this time, if the small hit flag is set (Y in step S93), the small hit variation pattern determination table is set as the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern (step S94). Note that only the variation pattern of variation number 16 shown in FIG. 16 is set in the small hit table.

  If the small hit flag is not set in step S93 (N in step S93), the CPU 56 identifies the total pending storage number by checking the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S95). Then, it is determined whether or not the total pending storage number is a predetermined number (for example, four) or more (step S96).

  If the value of the total pending storage number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (Y in step S96), the fluctuation pattern determination table for shortening is set as the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern (step S97). In the abbreviated loss table, fluctuation patterns 2 to 7 shown in FIG. 16 are set. If the value of the total pending storage number counter is less than the predetermined number (N in step S96), the non-shortened deviation variation pattern determination table is set as the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern (step S98). In the non-shortened deviation table, variation patterns with variation numbers 1, 3 to 7 shown in FIG. 16 are set.

  In the selection process of the variation pattern determination table for losing in steps S95 to S98, the table is not configured to be selected according to the gaming state (normal state, short time state, probability variation state), but depending on the gaming state. It is preferable that the variation pattern determination table is selected. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the total number of pending storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (4), the shortening variation pattern determination table is selected, and the total number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number (4). If so, the non-shortened deviation variation pattern determination table is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is the short-time state or the probability change state, if the total number of pending storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (one), the shortening variation pattern determination table is selected, and the total number of pending storages is equal to the predetermined number (1 If it is less than the number, the non-shortened deviation variation pattern determination table is selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out the random value MR3 (variation pattern determination random value) for determining the variation pattern from the random number storage buffer (step S99). Then, based on the value of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern read out in step S99, the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types by referring to the table set in any of steps S92, S94, S97, and S98. (Step S100).

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol variation designation command indicating the variation of the special symbol (step S101). Specifically, when the data indicating “first start prize” is set in the storage area, the CPU 56 transmits a first symbol variation designation command indicating the variation of the first special symbol, and stores the data in the storage region. When data indicating “second start winning” is set, a second symbol variation designation command indicating variation of the second special symbol is transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S100 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S102). Note that the special symbol variation time (variable display time) is determined by the processing of step S100.

  Note that the processing in step S101 may be executed after the processing in step S102. That is, after executing the control for transmitting the variation pattern command, the control for transmitting the symbol variation designation command may be performed.

  Then, according to the setting of the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started to change (step S103). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. In addition, in the special symbol display control process of step S33 without using the start flag or the end flag, when the variation of the special symbol is controlled based only on the value of the special symbol process flag, in step S103, the CPU 56 A flag indicating whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed may be set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S104). Note that the region (variation time timer) in which the variation time is set is the same both when the variation of the first special symbol is performed and when the variation of the second special symbol is performed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S105).

  In step S103, if data indicating "first start prize" is set in the storage area, the CPU 56 starts the variation of the first special symbol and sets "second start prize" in the storage area. When the data to be shown is set, the variation of the second special symbol is started.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol process is used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the special symbol process is also shared. Therefore, an area for storing the special symbol process processing program in the ROM 54 is also saved. Further, for example, the variable time timer (formed in the RAM 55) set in step S104 is shared by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which leads to a capacity saving of the RAM 55.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs any one of the display control 1 designation to the display result 7 designation according to the determined type of loss, big hit, small hit, or big hit (see FIG. 19). ) Is transmitted. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If it is not set, it is checked whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is not set, control is performed to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118). ). When the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 7 designation command (steps S116 and S117). When the big hit flag is set, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit one of the display results 3 to 5 designation command (steps S111 and S112). That is, when the first probability variable big hit flag is set, the display result 3 designation command is transmitted. When the second probability variation big hit flag is set, the display result 4 designation command is transmitted. When the third probability variation jackpot flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 5 designation command. If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set and the probability variation jackpot flag is not suddenly set, control for transmitting a display result 2 designation command is performed (steps S113 and S114). When the sudden probability big hit flag is set, control for transmitting a display result 6 designation command is performed (step S115).

  Next, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command designating that the total pending storage number is subtracted by 1 is transmitted (step S119). Instead of transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S120).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S121), and when the variable time timer times out (step S122), the symbol stop time (stop time of the special symbol stop symbol; For example, 1 second) is set and started (step S123).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (0.500 seconds in this example) to the symbol determination number 1 information timer (step S124). The symbol determination number 1 information timer is a timer for measuring the ON time of the symbol determination number 1 signal output from the information terminal board 34. Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol pointer is “first” (step S125). If the value of the special symbol pointer is “first” (that is, if the variation of the first special symbol is stopped), the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (0.500 in this example) to the symbol determination number 2 information timer. Second) is set (step S126). The symbol determination frequency 2 information timer is a timer for measuring the ON time of the symbol determination frequency 2 signal output from the information terminal board 34. If the value of the special symbol pointer is not “first” (that is, if the change of the second special symbol is stopped), the process proceeds to step S127.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Then, a control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (step S131). When data indicating “first start prize” is set in the storage area, the variation of the first special symbol is terminated, and data indicating “second start prize” is set in the storage area. To end the variation of the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command transmission completion flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been transmitted is set (step S131A). If set, the process proceeds to step S132A. If not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S131B), and sets a symbol confirmation designation command transmitted flag (step S131C). Then, the process proceeds to step S132A.

  Note that the symbol confirmation designation command is a common command that is used when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are designated to stop, but the first special symbol designation (stop) is designated. A symbol confirmation designation command and a second symbol confirmation designation command for designating stop (determination) of the second special symbol may be provided. In this case, for example, when N is determined in step S131A, it is specified whether the data indicating “first start prize” or the data indicating “second start prize” is set in the storage area, and corresponds. A symbol determination designation command may be transmitted.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the stop time timer (step S132A), and checks whether the value of the stop time timer has become 0 (timed out) (step S132B). When the value of the stop time timer is not 0 (when not timed out), the processing is terminated as it is. When the value of the stop time timer becomes 0, the processing after step S133A is executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S133A). If it is set, control for transmitting the jackpot start 2 designation command is performed (step S133B). Next, the CPU 56 clears the winning cumulative number counter (step S133C). Next, if the abnormal winning detection flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the abnormal winning detection flag (step S133D). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S309) (step S133E).

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S133F). If set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (step S134), and performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command (step S135). Specifically, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, a big hit start 3 designation command is transmitted, and when the probability variation big hit flag is suddenly set, a big hit 4 designation command is transmitted, and the probability variation big hit flag and suddenly If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the big hit in the effect display device 9, for example) is set in the pre-round start timer (step S136). Note that the jackpot display time is different for the 15-round jackpot and the 2-round jackpot. Next, the CPU 56 clears the winning cumulative number counter (step S137). Next, if the abnormal winning detection flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the abnormal winning detection flag (step S138). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S139).

  When the big hit flag is not set (N in step S133F), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S139A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S140 as it is. If not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S139B). If it is set, 1 is subtracted from the time-count counter for counting the number of times that the special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in the time-short state (step S139C), and whether the value of the time-count counter after subtraction is 0 or not. (Step S139D). If the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the time reduction flag is reset (step S139E). In this embodiment, the time reduction state is continued until the transition of the special symbol 100 times is completed after the transition to the time reduction state.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S140).

  Note that the processes of steps S133A to S133F may be executed immediately before the process of step S140. According to such a configuration, the number of time reductions can be accurately counted (subtracted). In other words, in this embodiment, even if the small hit game ends after the small hit occurs, the gaming state is not changed. Therefore, if the gaming state when the small hit is generated is the short-time state, the gaming state after the small hit game is also the short-time state. If the number of fluctuations in which the short-time state can continue after the end of the small hit game is the remaining number of fluctuations in the short-time state before the small hit occurs, the structure shown in FIG. In such a case, the process of subtracting the number of time reductions will not be performed. However, if the processes of steps S133A to S133F are executed immediately before the process of step S140, the process of subtracting the number of time reductions is performed in the fluctuation when the small hit occurs, and the time reduction number is accurately determined. Can be subtracted.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305) executed before each round in the big hit game. In the pre-opening process for the special winning opening, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the special command for opening the special winning opening if it has not been transmitted (steps S1470, S1471). Also, the value of the timer before the round start is decremented by 1 (step S1472). If it is before starting the first round, the big hit display time is set in the timer before starting the round. When the timer before the round start times out (the value of the timer before the round start is 0) (step S1473), the winning number counter is initialized (step S1474). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the opening time in the opening time timer (step S1475). Note that the CPU 56 sets, for example, 29.5 seconds as the opening time in the opening time timer when it is a big hit of 15 rounds. Further, if the CPU 56 suddenly has a probable big hit, the opening time timer sets, for example, 5 seconds as the opening time. Further, the special winning opening is controlled to be in an open state. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the open / close plate 16 (step S1476). In addition, a special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening is open is set (step S1477). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S306) (step S1478).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (step S306). In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the opening time timer has timed out (step S1480). If the open time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S1485. If the opening time timer has not timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the winning counter is 10 (step S1481). When the value of the winning number counter becomes 10, the process proceeds to step S1485. When the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the value of the opening time timer is decremented by 1 (step S1482). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (steps S1483 and S1484).

  In step S1485, the CPU 56 performs a process for ending the round. Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21 is stopped and the open / close plate 16 is closed. Also, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S1486). Then, control is performed to transmit a designation command after opening the big prize opening to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1487), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the post-winning prize closing process (step S307). Update (step S1488).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S308) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S154. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S151), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S152). When the probability variation jackpot flag is set, a jackpot end 2 designation command is transmitted, and when the probability variation jackpot flag is set suddenly, a jackpot end 3 designation command is transmitted, and the probability variation jackpot flag and sudden probability variation When the jackpot flag is not set, a jackpot end 1 designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S153), and the processing is ended. It should be noted that the count switch detection time shown in FIG. 37 is a sufficient time for the game ball to be detected by the count switch 23 after winning the winning ball. For example, if it takes a maximum of 1.0 seconds for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening and be detected by the count switch 23, the count switch detection time is longer than 1.0 seconds. Therefore, a predetermined interval period (for example, 1 second) can be provided after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is physically closed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball that has won a winning prize immediately before the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed is determined to be an abnormal winning.

  In step S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S156).

  If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the set flag (probability variation jackpot flag) is reset (step S157), the probability variation flag is set, and the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state (step S158). Next, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S159). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S160).

  When the probability variation jackpot flag is not set (N in step S156), it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is suddenly set (step S161). If the sudden probability change jackpot flag is set, the set flag (sudden probability change jackpot flag) is reset (step S162), and the chance mode flag is set to shift to the chance mode state (step S163). Further, the probability variation flag is set, and the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state (step S164). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S160).

  If the sudden probability big hit flag has not been set (N in step S161), the CPU 56 sets a predetermined value (100 in this embodiment) to the hour / count counter (step S165). Also, a time reduction flag is set (step S159). In other words, in this embodiment, after the normal big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is finished. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S160).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S311) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S170). If the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S174. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the small hit flag is reset (step S171). Then, the small hit end display timer sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (small hit end display time) in the small hit end display timer ( Step S173), the process is terminated. It should be noted that the count switch detection time shown in FIG. 38 is a sufficient time for the game ball to be detected by the count switch 23 after winning the big winning opening.

  In step S174, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S175). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the chance mode flag is set to shift to the chance mode state (step S176). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S177).

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S28) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S4111). A switch passage process (step S4112) is executed. Then, the CPU 56 executes any one of the processes shown in steps S4100 to S4103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Gate switch passage processing (step S4112): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination (MR4) and storing it in a storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passages through the gate.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S4100): The CPU 56 can start the normal symbol variation (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S4100, specifically, the normal symbol is processed). When the display 10 does not display the change of the normal symbol, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not in the open / close operation based on the normal symbol display 10 being hit and displayed, the gate pass memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S4101).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S4101): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 and sets the normal symbol process timer to normal. Set the symbol stop symbol display time and start the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S4102).

  Normal symbol stop process (step S4102): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, it checks whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S4100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory operating time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Further, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 is set. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S4103).

  Normal electric accessory actuating process (step S4103): The CPU 56 is based on the fact that the normal symbol process timer has not timed out, and the number of game balls won in the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) (second start) A normal electric winning combination winning count process for counting the number of winning prizes to the winning opening 14 is executed, and the normal electric winning combination is opened with the set opening pattern (opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is executed). ) Normal electric accessory release pattern processing is executed. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S4100).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal process (step S4100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step S4121). If the gate passing memory number is 0 (Y in step S4121), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S4121), the CPU 56 reads the normal symbol per-design random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1, and the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (Step S4122). Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the gate passage storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S4123). That is, the random number value for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the order of the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the normal random number for symbol determination from the random number storage buffer (step S4124), and determines whether to win or not based on the read random number value (step S4125). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for normal symbol determination matches the hit determination value, and if there is a matching hit determination value, it is determined to be a hit.

  In step S4125, the CPU 56 may determine that the winning is made with a different probability depending on whether or not the time reduction flag is set. In this case, for example, if the time reduction flag is set, it may be determined that the winning is at a higher probability than when it is not set. For example, a short time per hour determination table used when the gaming state is in the short time state and a normal hourly team hand table used when the gaming state is not in the short time state are prepared in advance. Then, if the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction per hour determination table is selected, and it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol matches the hit determination value of the selected time reduction per hour determination table. To determine whether or not to win. If the hourly flag is not set, the normal hour hit determination table is selected, and it is determined whether or not the random number for normal symbol determination matches the hit determination value of the selected normal hour hit determination table. To determine whether or not to win.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (step S4126), and starts the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 (step S4127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S4101) (step S4128).

  In step S4126, the CPU 56 may set a different normal symbol variation time depending on whether or not the time reduction flag is set. In this case, for example, if the time reduction flag is set, a shorter normal symbol variation time may be set as compared to when the time reduction flag is not set.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (step S4101). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S4131). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S4131), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S4135).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol change time has elapsed (Y in step S4131), the CPU 56 stops the normal symbol change in the normal symbol display 10 (step S4132). Then, the CPU 56 sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer (step S4133). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S4102) (step S4134).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step S4102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S4141). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S4141), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S4142).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S4141), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (in step S4125). (Whether or not it was determined to be a win) is confirmed (step S4143). Note that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is determined by, for example, setting a normal symbol per symbol determination flag when it is determined to be a winning symbol in step S4125 and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can do.

  When the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step S4143), the CPU 56 sets the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer (step S4144). The ordinary electric accessory operating time is the maximum time during which the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) can operate.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets the release pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 in the release pattern buffer (step S4145). When the opening pattern is set in the opening pattern buffer, the opening pattern time (in this case, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set) is added to the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern timer (the timer for measuring the opening time and closing time of the ordinary electric accessory). A process of setting a closing time until the first opening is performed is also performed.

  Next, the CPU 56 clears the start winning cumulative number counter (step S4146). If the abnormal start winning detection flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the abnormal start winning detection flag (step S4147). Thereafter, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S4103) (step S4148).

  In step S4145, the CPU 56 may set a different release pattern depending on whether or not the time reduction flag is set. In this case, for example, if the short time flag is set, an opening pattern with a long opening time or a large number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 may be set as compared with the case where it is not set. Good.

  If it is determined in step S4143 that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a missing symbol (N in step S4143), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a normal symbol normal process (step S4100). Is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) (step S4149).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory actuating process (step S4103). In the normal electric actor operation processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S4161). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S4161), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S4162).

  Then, the CPU 56 loads the switch-on buffer into the register (step S4163). The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when switch-on is detected, and 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch-off is detected.

  The CPU 56 checks whether 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (corresponding bit of the second start port switch 14a) (step S4164). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14). If 1 is not set in the second start port switch input bit (N in Step S4164), the process proceeds to Step S4168. If 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (Y in step S4164), the second start port switch 14a has been turned on, so the CPU 56 performs the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15). 1 is added to the number counter for the number of winnings of the ordinary electric accessory that counts the number of game balls won in step S4165. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory winning number counter is less than 8 (step S4166). If the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is not less than 8 (N in step S4166), that is, if it is 8 or more, the CPU 56 clears (sets to 0) the value of the normal symbol process timer (step S4167). With this process, the ordinary electric accessory actuating process is ended (see Y in step S4161, S4172). Thus, in this embodiment, when eight or more game balls win the variable winning ball device 15 within the normal electric accessory operating time, the normal electric accessory operating process is terminated.

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer by -1 (step S4168). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer is 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer has expired (step S4169). If it has not timed out (N in step S4169), the processing is terminated as it is. If time-out has occurred (Y in step S4169), the CPU 56 sets the release pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer (step S4170). Then, the CPU 56 drives the solenoid 16 to open or close the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) (step S4171).

  Specifically, when the normal electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, the release time is set as the open pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer, and the output port buffer ( The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened by inverting the solenoid output bit of the ordinary electric accessory of the solenoid buffer. If the normal electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the normal electric accessory release pattern timer sets a closing time as the open pattern time, and the normal output port buffer (solenoid buffer) The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed by reversing the electric accessory solenoid output bit.

  In this embodiment, for example, a pattern including a closing time of at least 1 second after a predetermined opening time is used as the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15. Therefore, a predetermined interval period (for example, 1 second) can be provided after the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is physically closed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball that has won a prize at the second start winning opening 14 immediately before the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed is determined to be an abnormal prize.

  In step S4161, when the normal symbol process timer expires (Y in step S4161), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the value indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S4100) (specifically, “0”). (Step S4172).

  Next, control signals transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a payout command signal and the like transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  The power supply confirmation signal is a signal that is at a high level (on state) when the main board 31 rises, and is at a low level (off state) when power supply is detected. The prize ball REQ signal is a signal (that is, a trigger signal for a prize ball payout request) that becomes a low level (on state) when a prize ball payout request (when a prize ball number command is transmitted). The prize ball REQ signal becomes a high level (off state) when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on after being turned on from the payout control microcomputer 370. The 4-bit award ball number signal is a signal (award ball number command) output for designating the number (1 to 15) of game balls to be paid out.

  The prize ball BUSY signal is a signal that is set to a high level (on state) when the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the on state of the prize ball REQ signal, and is turned off after a predetermined period. That is, it corresponds to an acceptance confirmation signal for the prize ball REQ signal. Therefore, the state in which the prize ball BUSY signal is OFF corresponds to a state of waiting for a prize ball number command reception. The payout error signal is a signal that becomes a high level (ON state) when a prize ball payout error occurs. The ball-out signal is a signal that becomes high level (ON state) when the ball-out switch 187 is turned on. The full tank signal is a signal that becomes high level (ON state) when the full switch 48 is turned on. The prize ball count signal is a payout control signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 and is a signal corresponding to a detection signal of the payout number count switch 301.

  The prize ball REQ signal becomes low level (on state) when a prize ball payout request is made (when a prize ball number command is transmitted), and when a prize ball payout completion is received (when the prize ball BUSY signal is off). The signal is set to a high level (off state), and the prize ball BUSY signal is set to a high level (on state) when a prize ball payout request is received (when the prize ball REQ signal is on), and low when the prize is completed. It may be a signal to be turned off. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal when the prize ball payout is requested, and the payout control microcomputer 370 turns on the prize ball BUSY signal when the prize ball REQ signal is turned on. When the required number of prize balls is paid out, the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off, and the game control microcomputer 560 turns off the prize ball BUSY signal. The prize ball REQ signal may be turned off.

  FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of each control signal shown in FIG. FIG. 45 shows that signals indicating an abnormality relating to payout (payout error signal, out of ball signal, full tank signal) are also transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560. Yes. Also, a prize ball count signal indicating a state of a detection signal of the number-of-payout count switch 301 at the time of prize ball payout is transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 45, the power confirmation signal, the prize ball REQ signal, and the prize ball number signal are output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67, and the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. Is input. A signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 is output by the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output circuit 373B, and input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 68.

  FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a payout command signal and the like. As shown in FIG. 46, the winning detection switch (the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a) has detected the winning of the game ball. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal and turns the output state of the prize ball number signal into a state corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with winning. Specifically, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that a game ball has won a winning area provided in the gaming machine by a detection signal of the winning detection switch, the gaming control microcomputer 560 calculates a predetermined number of winning balls. It is added to the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer. When the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer becomes a non-zero value, the winning ball REQ signal is turned on, and the output state of the winning ball number signal is set in accordance with the number of winning balls to be paid out according to winning. Put it in a state.

  In this embodiment, five game balls are paid out when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, and 15 game balls are detected when the count switch 23 detects a game ball. Perform prize ball payout. When game balls are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, seven prize balls are paid out. Further, as described above, since the prize ball number signal is composed of 4 bits, among the prize ball number signals of 00 (H) to 0F (H) expressed in 8 bits, the lower 4 bits are The signal is transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37 by the award ball number signal. Hereinafter, it may be expressed as “00 (H) to 0F (H) prize ball number signal”, but in actuality, the prize ball number signal is represented by 8 bits. This corresponds to the lower 4 bits of 0F (H).

  The payout control microcomputer 370 continues the on state of the award ball BUSY signal for a predetermined time (award ball BUSY signal on time) when the award ball REQ signal is turned on. Is turned off. In the payout control microcomputer 370, the ball payout device 97 is operated to execute the prize ball payout processing. Specifically, the payout motor 289 is rotated by the number designated by the prize ball number signal, and the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number signal is paid out. The payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of the prize ball, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control microcomputer 370 each time the prize ball detects the payout. The payout control microcomputer 370 outputs a prize ball count signal to the game control microcomputer 560 each time a detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 is input.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 confirms that the prize ball BUSY signal has changed to the OFF state, the game control microcomputer 560 turns the prize ball BUSY signal to the OFF state after a predetermined time (a prize ball REQ signal OFF waiting time) has elapsed. At that time, the output state of the prize ball number signal is cleared and turned off. That is, a state in which the prize ball number signal indicates 0 (a state in which an invalid command is output) is set.

  Next, the switch process (step S21) in the main process will be described. In this embodiment, when the ON state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is certainly turned on. Specifically, the switch process is activated every 2 ms. However, if it is detected that both the switch process activated at the present time and the switch process activated 2 ms before are turned on, the switch process is surely performed. Determined to be on.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing each 1-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switching process. The last-time port buffer is a buffer in which the switch-on / off determination result of the last time (assuming 4 ms before) is stored. The previous port buffer is a buffer that stores the previous switch-on / off determination result (assumed to be 2 ms before). As described above, in the switch-on buffer, when a switch on is detected, 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch, and when a switch off is detected, 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch. It is a buffer. The previous data is a buffer area that is temporarily used when the switch process is executed. The previous-time port buffer, the previous port buffer, the switch-on buffer, and the previous data are formed in the RAM 55. Further, the bit arrangement of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times in advance corresponds to the bit arrangement of the input port 0. That is, information corresponding to each of the switch detection signals assigned to bits 0 to 7 of input port 0 is set to bits 0 to 7 of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times before.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a processing example of the switch processing in step S21 in the game control processing. In the switch process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) sets the contents of the previous port buffer to the previous data (step S331). Further, the exclusive OR of the contents of the port buffer and the previous data is taken twice before (step S332). Then, the result of the exclusive OR operation is set as the previous data (step S333). At this stage, in the previous data, the bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. In addition, the contents of the previous port buffer are set in the port buffer two times before (step S334).

  Then, input port 0 data is input (step S335), and the input data is set in the previous port buffer (step S336). The processes in steps S334 and S336 correspond to a preparation process when the switch process is executed next time (after 2 ms).

  Next, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the data input from the input port 0 and the previous data (step S337). At this stage, in the previous data, a bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. That is, among the detection signals of the seven switches, the bit corresponding to the detection signal changed from the state before 2 ms from the state before 4 ms (from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”). Is “1”. Therefore, when the logical product of the previous data and the data input from the input port 0 is taken in step S337, the bit that is “1” in the data input from the input port 0 and 2 ms before The bit whose state has changed from the state 4 ms before becomes “1”. That is, as a result of the logical product operation, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the current state is the on state and has been detected to have changed from the off state to the on state during the previous switch processing (2 ms before) is “ 1 ”. In other words, the bit corresponding to the detection signal that has changed from the off state to the on state and then detected the on state twice in succession is “1”. Note that “continuously twice” means “both the switch process executed at a certain time and the switch process executed 2 ms after the switch process”.

  The CPU 56 stores the result of the logical product operation in the switch-on buffer (step S338). In the switch-on buffer, after changing from the off state to the on state, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the on state is detected twice consecutively is “1”. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can confirm that the detection signal of the switch corresponding to the bit which is “1” in the switch-on buffer is surely turned on. Note that “definitely” means that the ON state has been detected twice in succession, that is, it can be considered that the ON state has continued for 4 ms, so it is determined that the ON state of the detection signal is not due to noise or the like. It can be done.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S31. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S341) and a prize ball control process (step S342). Then, the contents of the port 0 buffer formed in the RAM 55 are output to the output port 0 (step S343). The contents of the port 0 buffer are updated in the prize ball control process.

  In the prize ball number adding process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 50 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “7”) is set at the start address of the winning ball number table, and the switch input bit determination for each switch of the winning opening from which the winning ball is to be paid out by winning from the next address. The value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to the bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input (see FIG. 9).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number adding process in step S341. In the winning ball number adding process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) sets the start address of the winning ball number table as a pointer (step S351). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S352). Next, the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (step S353).

  Then, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S354), and the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit determination value) is calculated (step S355). . Further, the value of the pointer is increased by 1 (step S356).

  If the calculation result in step S355 is 0 (Y in step S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not on, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S359), and if the number of processes is 0 The process ends, and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S354 (step S360).

  If the calculation result in step S355 is not 0 (N in step S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the abnormal winning detection flag is set. (Step S362). If the abnormal winning detection flag is set, the process proceeds to step S359. If the abnormal winning detection flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the abnormal starting winning detection flag is set (step S363). If the abnormal start winning detection flag is set, the process proceeds to step S359.

  The fact that the abnormal winning detection flag is set is a case where an abnormal winning to the big winning opening is detected in an abnormality notification process (see step S23) described later. In this case, the CPU 56 does not execute control for adding the prize ball addition value to the total prize ball number storage buffer. That is, the prize ball payout based on the count switch 23 being turned on is not executed (the processes in steps S364 and S365 are skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S359. The abnormal start winning detection flag is set when an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected in an abnormality notification process (see step S23) described later. In this case, the CPU 56 does not execute control for adding the prize ball addition value to the total prize ball number storage buffer. That is, the prize ball payout based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is turned on is not executed (steps S364 and S365 are skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  In this embodiment, the case where the winning ball payout is not necessarily executed when the abnormal winning detection flag or the starting abnormal winning detection flag is set is shown. However, the abnormal winning detection flag is set. In such a case, control is performed so that only the winning ball payout for the winning at the big winning opening is not performed, and when the abnormal start winning detection flag is set, the payout for winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is limited. You may control not to perform. For example, if the CPU 56 determines N in step S361, the CPU 56 checks whether the value pointed to by the pointer is a value indicating the count switch input bit determination value. If it is a value indicating the count switch input bit determination value, it is confirmed whether or not an abnormal winning detection flag is set. If the abnormal winning detection flag is set, the process proceeds to step S359, and control is performed so that no prize ball is paid out. If the abnormal winning detection flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S364, and control is performed so as to execute a payout. If it is not a value indicating the count switch input bit determination value, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value indicated by the pointer is a value indicating the second start port switch input bit determination value. If it is not a value indicating the second start port switch input bit determination value, the process proceeds to step S364 as it is, and control is performed to execute award ball payout. If the value indicates the second start port switch input bit determination value, it is confirmed whether or not the start abnormal winning detection flag is set. If the start abnormal winning detection flag is set, the process proceeds to step S359, and control is performed so that no prize ball is paid out. If the abnormal start winning detection flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S364, and control is performed so as to execute a prize ball payout.

  If the start abnormal winning detection flag is not set (N in Step S363), the CPU 56 sets the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of prize balls) to the prize ball addition value (Step S364). ), The prize ball addition value is added to the content of the 16-bit total prize ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S365). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S357 and S358). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control processing in step S342. In the prize ball control process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes any one of steps S371 to S374 according to the value of the prize ball process code.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the prize waiting process 1 (step S371) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is zero. In the award ball waiting process 1, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the award ball BUSY signal is on (step S3701). At this stage, since the prize ball BUSY signal should not be in the on state, when the prize ball BUSY signal is in the on state, the prize ball abnormal state output value (20 (H)) is stored in the port 0 buffer. To complete the processing (step S3702). When the prize ball abnormal state output value is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are outputted to the output port 0 in step S343 (see FIG. 49), whereby the prize ball REQ signal and the power supply confirmation signal are output. All the prize ball number signals are turned off (see FIG. 7).

  If the prize ball BUSY signal is off, the prize ball waiting output value (30 (H)) is set in the port 0 buffer (step S3703). When the prize ball waiting output value is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are output to the output port 0 in step S343, so that the prize ball REQ signal is turned off and the power confirmation signal is output. Is kept on (see FIG. 7). In addition, the award ball number signal enters an invalid command (00 (H)). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball timer is 0 (step S3704). If the prize ball timer is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decreased by 1 (step S3705), and the process is terminated. The prize ball timer is a timer for measuring the time required for prize ball processing. At this stage, if the value of the prize ball timer is not 0, the next prize ball after the previous payout process is completed. Waiting time until the REQ signal is turned on (time for providing a plurality of prize ball REQ signals during the on period when prize ball payout is continuously executed, 00 (H ) During which the award ball number signal is output). The prize ball timer is set in step S3735 of the prize ball waiting process 3 described later. In addition, after the execution of the award ball waiting process 3 in step S374 is completed and the previous payout process is completed, the processes of steps S3703 to S3705 are turned off and the award ball number signal is invalidated. This is a process for outputting a command (00 (H)).

  If the value of the prize ball timer is 0, then the CPU 56 checks the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (step S3706). If the value is 0, the process ends. If not, the prize ball process code value is set to 1 (step S3707), and the process ends.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a prize ball transmission process (step S372) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 1. The game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) in the prize ball transmission process. Confirmation is made (step S3711). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S3712). If the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer are smaller than the maximum prize ball command value, the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer are set in the prize ball number buffer (step S3713).

  Thereafter, the output value (10 (H)) in the prize ball REQ is set in the port 0 buffer (step S3714). When the output value in the prize ball REQ is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are output to the output port 0 in step S343, so that the prize ball REQ signal is turned on, and the power confirmation signal Is kept on (see FIG. 7). Further, the contents of the winning ball number buffer are set in the lower 4 bits of the port 0 buffer (step S3715). Thereafter, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 2 (step S3716), and the process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the maximum value of the prize ball command is “15”. Therefore, a prize ball number signal designating the maximum number of payouts of “15” is transmitted to the payout control board 37.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the prize waiting process 2 (step S373) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 2. In the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), a prize ball output (turned on) by the payout control means in response to the prize ball REQ being turned on in the prize ball waiting process 2. It is checked whether or not the BUSY signal is turned on (step S3721). When the on-state is not turned on, a BUSY start determination time value (for example, 2) is set in the prize ball timer (step S3722). The BUSY start determination time value is for the game control microcomputer 560 to confirm that the prize ball BUSY signal has been output (turned on) if the prize ball BUSY signal remains on for the time indicated by the value. Is the value of

  Accordingly, the CPU 56 checks the value of the prize ball timer when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on (step S3723), and if the value is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decreased by 1 (step S3724), and processing is performed. Exit. When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0, it is determined that the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on, and the contents of the prize ball number buffer are changed from the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (the number of prize balls paid out to the payout control means). Is subtracted (step S3725). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3 (step S2726), and the process is terminated.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the award ball waiting process 3 (step S374) executed when the value of the award ball process code is 3. The game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) confirms whether or not the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off in the prize ball waiting process 3 (step S3731). When not in the off state, a BUSY end determination time value (for example, 3) is set in the prize ball timer (step S3732). The BUSY end determination time value is a value for creating a prize ball REQ signal OFF waiting period.

  Accordingly, the CPU 56 checks the value of the prize ball timer when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off (step S3733), and if the value is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decreased by 1 (step S3734), and processing is performed. Exit. When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0, that is, when the prize ball REQ signal off waiting period ends, the prize ball REQ waiting time is set in the prize ball timer (step S3735). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 0 (step S3736), and the process is terminated. As described above, the award ball REQ waiting time is the waiting time until the next award ball REQ signal is turned on (when award ball payout is continuously performed, the on periods of a plurality of award ball REQ signals are Is a time for providing an interval).

  Through the above processing, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the total number of game balls as prize balls to be paid out based on the establishment of the payout condition in the total prize ball number storage buffer so as to be specified. The total award ball number storage buffer corresponds to a prize game medium number storage means for storing stored contents for at least a predetermined period by a backup power source as a variable data storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Further, the game control means transmits a payout command signal for designating a payout number of a predetermined number of prize balls to the payout control means based on the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer. Here, the predetermined number is 15 if the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer is 15 or more, and is stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer if it is less than 15. The number of prize balls. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a subtraction process is performed for subtracting the number of payouts specified by the payout command signal from the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer.

  57 to 59 are flowcharts showing the abnormality notifying process in step S23. In the abnormality notification process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) checks whether or not the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set (step S251). The abnormality notification prohibition flag is set in a main process that is executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S44). When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S255. If the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set, the value of the prohibition period timer set in step S45 is decremented by 1 (step S252). When the value of the prohibition period timer becomes 0, that is, when the prohibition period timer times out, the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset (steps S253 and S254).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S255). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (Y in step S255), the game is in a big hit game or a small hit game. If it is in such a state, there is a possibility that the game ball will win the big winning opening, and therefore the process proceeds to the process of step S267 without performing the confirmation process of the abnormal winning to the big winning opening.

  The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 is a state where neither a big hit game nor a small hit game is played. In this state, if there is a game ball winning at the big winning opening, there is a possibility that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, an abnormal winning confirmation process for the special winning opening shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (N in step S255), the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S256). Then, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the count switch input bit determination value (01 (H), see FIGS. 9 and 47) (step S257). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 01 (H), that is, when the count switch 23 is on, the logical product operation result is 01 (H). When the count switch 23 is not turned on, the operation result of the logical product is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S258), it is the case where the game ball has won the big winning opening regardless of the state other than the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state. In this case, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the winning cumulative number counter (step S259). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the winning cumulative number counter is equal to or greater than a second predetermined value (5 in this example) (step S260). If the value of the winning cumulative number counter is not equal to or greater than the second predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S263. If the value of the winning prize cumulative number counter is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines to notify that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred, and sets an abnormal winning detection flag (step S261). Then, control for transmitting an abnormal winning notification designation command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S262).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the accumulated prize counter after the addition is equal to or greater than a first predetermined value (1 in this example) (step S263). If it is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning at the special winning opening has occurred, and sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) to the abnormal signal information timer (step S264). The abnormal signal information timer is a timer for measuring the ON time of the abnormal signal output from the information terminal board 34. If the value of the abnormal signal information timer is not 0, an abnormal signal is externally output via the information terminal board 34 in the information output process described later. Accordingly, when a predetermined time is set in the abnormal signal information timer in step S264, external output of the abnormal signal via the information terminal board 34 is started.

  When the first predetermined value is 1, when it is determined as N in step S260 or when the process of step S262 is executed, the process of step S264 is directly performed without performing the determination process of step S263. And a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) may be set in the abnormal signal information timer.

  As described above, by executing the processing of steps S263 and S264, an abnormal signal is output to the outside, and the possibility of occurrence of an abnormal winning can be notified to the outside (specifically, a game store) at an early stage. Further, by executing the processing of steps S260 to S262, an abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted, so that abnormal notification can be performed after an abnormal winning is surely generated on the gaming machine side. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In step S267, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3. The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 is a state where it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) is in the open state (when the variable winning ball device 15 is physically open). And when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is physically closed until a predetermined interval period elapses). If it is in such a state (Y in step S267), there is a possibility that the game ball may win the second start winning opening 14, so that the confirmation process of the abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is not performed. The process proceeds to step S279.

  The state in which the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in Step S267) is a state in which the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) is determined to be in a state other than the open state. If there is a game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 in such a state, there is a possibility that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, the abnormal winning confirmation process to the second start winning opening 14 shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S267), the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S268). Then, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the second start port switch input bit determination value (80 (H), see FIGS. 9 and 47) (step S269). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 80 (H), that is, when the second start port switch 14a is on, the logical product operation result is 80 (H). When the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the logical operation result is not 0 (N in step S270), the second start winning port 14 is in a state other than the open state (including the state of the predetermined interval period), but the second start This is a case where a game ball has won the winning opening 14. In this case, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the start winning cumulative number counter (step S271). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the start winning cumulative number counter is equal to or greater than a second predetermined value (5 in this example) (step S272). If the value of the start winning cumulative number counter is not equal to or greater than the second predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S275. If the value of the start winning cumulative number counter is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines to notify that an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred, and sets a start abnormal winning detection flag. At the same time (step S273), control is performed to transmit a start abnormal prize notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S274).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the start winning cumulative number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than a first predetermined value (1 in this example) (step S275). If the value is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14, and sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S276). ).

  As described above, by executing the processes of steps S275 and S276, an abnormal signal is output to the outside, and the possibility of occurrence of a start abnormal winning can be notified to the outside (specifically, a game store) at an early stage. . In addition, by executing the processing of steps S272 to S274, the start abnormality winning notification designation command is transmitted, so that the start abnormality notification is performed after the start abnormality winning is surely generated on the gaming machine side. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  When the first predetermined value is 1, when it is determined as N in step S272 or when the process of step S274 is executed, the process of step S276 is performed without performing the determination process of step S275. And a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) may be set in the abnormal signal information timer.

  When the count switch 23 is turned on in a state where neither a big hit game nor a small hit game is performed by the processing as described above, an abnormal signal is output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 and an abnormal winning notification is designated. A command is sent. In addition, when the second start opening switch 14a is turned on when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not opened or closed (the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state), an abnormal signal is transmitted to the information terminal board 34. And a start abnormal prize notification designation command is transmitted.

  In addition, the process of steps S251 to S253 prohibits the start of abnormality notification when the production control microcomputer 100 is performing initialization notification. The production control microcomputer 100 continues to execute the initialization notification until the period corresponding to the prohibition period has elapsed since the start of the abnormality notification.

  In the process of step S255, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning in the big winning opening has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag. Therefore, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. Further, as described above, since the big hit end process or the small hit end process is executed for a predetermined time after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 has won a big winning opening immediately before closing. The game ball is prevented from being detected by the count switch 23 after the value of the special symbol process flag returns to 0, and an error is not notified even though it is a regular winning. . Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a state other than the big hit gaming state, an abnormal winning is obtained based on the fact that a plurality (second predetermined value (for example, 5)) of gaming balls are won in the big winning opening. Since the notification designation command is transmitted and the abnormal winning notification is performed, an error is notified even if the winning in the big winning opening is detected once in a state other than the big hit gaming state, even though it is a regular winning. The situation is prevented.

  Also, in the process of step S267, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 based on the value of the normal symbol process flag. Therefore, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. In addition, as described above, as a method of delaying the timing for determining an abnormal prize from the timing for closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set a predetermined time before the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. Is closed, and when the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, an abnormal winning determination is made. Therefore, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is won at the second start winning opening 14 immediately before closing. The game ball is prevented from being detected by the second start switch 14a after the value of the normal symbol process flag returns to 0, and an error is reported even though it is a regular winning. There is nothing. Further, in this embodiment, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state other than the open state, a plurality (second predetermined value (for example, 5)) of gaming balls have won the second starting winning opening 14. On the basis of this, since the abnormal start winning notification designation command is transmitted to perform the start abnormal winning notification, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is detected only once at the second start winning opening 14 in a state other than the open state. This prevents a situation in which an error is reported in spite of a regular winning.

  At the same time that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, and the abnormal winning determination is made after a predetermined time has elapsed since the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. May be. Also, in the determination of the abnormal winning to the big winning opening, the timing for determining the abnormal winning by the same method may be delayed from the timing for closing the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the magnetic detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 90 has been turned on (step S279). If the magnetic detection signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines that a magnetic abnormality in the special winning opening has been detected, and performs control to transmit a magnetic abnormality notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S280). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S281).

  By executing the processing of steps S279 to S281, an abnormality can be detected when an illegal act is performed such as using a magnet or the like to win a game ball in the big prize opening, and the occurrence of the abnormality is notified. And can be output externally via the information terminal board 34.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the vibration detection signal output from the vibration sensor 91 has been turned on (step S282). If the vibration detection signal is on, the CPU 56 determines that a vibration abnormal state of the gaming machine has been detected, and performs control to transmit a vibration abnormality notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S283). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S284).

  By executing the processing of steps S282 to S284, an abnormality can be detected when an action that vibrates the gaming machine and illegally wins the game ball is performed, and the occurrence of the abnormality can be notified. The information can be output externally via the information terminal board 34.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the special winning opening open flag is set (step S285). When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y of step S285), it is when the big prize opening is controlled to the open state. In such a state, when the special winning opening signal is not on (N in step S289), there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the special winning opening. Specifically, it is considered that there is an abnormality in which the big prize opening is not opened even though the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to open the big prize opening. Therefore, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an abnormal opening notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S290). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S291).

  Further, when the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S285), the special winning opening is controlled to be closed. In such a state, if the special winning opening signal is on (Y in step S286), there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the special winning opening. Specifically, it is considered that there is an abnormality in which the big prize opening is not closed even though the game control microcomputer 560 performs control for closing the big prize opening. Therefore, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an abnormal opening notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S287). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S288).

  It should be noted that the grand prize opening is not opened when the big prize opening open flag is set, and that the big prize opening is opened when the big prize opening open flag is not set, Marked as abnormal opening.

  Here, the processes of steps S287 and 288 are executed when the big prize opening is opened in a state where the big prize opening is not controlled to be in the open state. That is, it is a process executed when it is considered that an illegal act has been performed. On the other hand, the processing in steps S290 and 291 is a process executed when the big prize opening is not opened in the state where the big prize opening is controlled to be in the opened state. In other words, this is a process executed when it is considered that fraud has not been performed (for example, when the big prize opening is not opened due to a failure of the solenoid 21 or the like). Therefore, even when it is considered that no illegal act has been performed, an abnormality notification similar to that at the occurrence of the illegal act is performed. Therefore, in the process of step S290, a command different from the command transmitted in step S287 may be transmitted, and the occurrence of abnormality may be notified in a manner different from the case where the command is transmitted in step S287. . According to such a configuration, when it is considered that fraud has not been performed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests and trouble occurrence with the player by performing an abnormality notification similar to that at the time of fraud. it can.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the state of the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 and the output state of the prize ball count signal. As shown in FIG. 60, the state of the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 and the output state of the prize ball count signal are almost similar. The delay time of the output state of the prize ball count signal from the state of the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 corresponds to the processing time in the payout control microcomputer 370. In this embodiment, even when a game ball is paid out based on a ball lending request from the card unit 50, the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on, but the payout control microcomputer 370 is turned on. Transmits a prize ball count signal only when a prize ball is paid out based on winning.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball count signal not only when a game ball is paid out based on a winning prize but also when a game ball is paid out based on a ball lending request. You may do it. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the payout of the game ball is a payout of the game ball based on the winning, for example, based on whether or not the prize ball REQ signal is on. In addition, a count switch (award ball payout number count switch) for detecting the payout of game balls based on winning and a count switch (a ball lending payout number switch) for detecting payout of game balls based on a ball lending request are provided separately. You may do it. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs a prize ball count signal based on the input of the detection signal of the prize ball payout number count switch. In addition, when a prize ball payout number count switch and a ball lending payout number count switch are provided separately, a signal line for transmitting a detection signal of the prize ball payout number count switch is branched (for example, on the payout control board 37). By branching the signal line to the main board 31, the detection signal from the prize ball payout number counting switch may be directly input to the main board 31 (game control microcomputer 560). . In this case, it is not necessary to output a prize ball count signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing various signals output to the information terminal board. As shown in FIG. 61, in this embodiment, from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 to the information terminal board 34, the start port 1 signal, the symbol determination frequency 2 signal, the symbol determination frequency One signal, one jackpot signal, two jackpot signals, a short time signal, four jackpot signals, three jackpot signals, an abnormal signal, and a prize ball information signal (prize ball signal) are output by the information output process (step S30). In this embodiment, a door opening signal is output to the information terminal board 34 via the backup power supply circuit 506 mounted on the main board 31 without passing through the game control microcomputer 560.

  The starting port 1 signal is a signal for notifying the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14. The symbol determination number 2 signal is a signal for notifying the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol. The symbol determination number 1 signal is a signal for notifying the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The big hit 1 signal is a signal for notifying that the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress (during the operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus). The jackpot 2 signal is a signal to notify that the jackpot game or the jackpot game (during the operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus), or that the special symbol variable time reduction function is in operation (during the short-time state). It is. The time reduction signal is a signal for notifying that the special symbol variation time reduction function is operating (in the time reduction state). The big hit 4 signal is a signal for notifying that the probability variation function is in operation (in the probability variation state). The jackpot 3 signal is a signal for notifying that a 15-round jackpot game is in progress.

  The abnormal signal is a signal for notifying that various abnormalities have been detected. In this embodiment, the abnormal signal detects an abnormal winning state of the gaming machine when detecting an abnormal winning to the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14, detecting a magnetic abnormality to the big winning opening. In this case, it is output when the abnormal winning opening is detected.

  The prize ball information signal (also called prize ball signal or payout information) is a signal for notifying the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine. The door opening signal is a signal for notifying that the door of the gaming machine (the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate) and the gaming frame 11 are being opened.

  FIG. 62 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the start port 1 signal. As shown in FIG. 62, the start port 1 signal is output for 0.200 seconds each time the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a detects the passage of the game ball (when turned on). Is turned on. However, when the first start port switch 13a detects the passage of a plurality of game balls at intervals shorter than 0.200 seconds, or the second start port switch 14a detects a plurality of game balls at intervals shorter than 0.200 seconds. When detecting the passage of the game ball, the interval between the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 13a and the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 14a may be shorter than 0.200 seconds. In this case, signals based on the two start winnings are duplicated, and the start winnings cannot be recognized in the hall computer. Therefore, in the above case, the start port 1 signal is output after an interval of 0.200 seconds from the end of the output of the start port 1 signal. Thereby, even if the start winnings are continuously generated within a predetermined period (0.200 seconds), the hall computer can surely recognize the starting port 1 signal based on each starting win. it can.

  FIG. 63 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the symbol determination number 2 signal. As shown in FIG. 63, the symbol determination number 2 signal is output for 0.500 seconds after the first special symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  FIG. 64 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the symbol determination number 1 signal. As shown in FIG. 64, the symbol determination number 1 signal is output for 0.500 seconds after the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped.

  FIG. 65 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of one jackpot signal. As shown in FIG. 65, the jackpot 1 signal is output during the operation of the special variable winning ball device (the accessory continuous operation device) (during the big hit game or the small hit game).

  FIG. 66 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of two jackpot signals. As shown in FIG. 66, the two jackpot signals are generated during operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus (a continuous action device for an accessory) (during a big hit game or a small hit game), or during a special symbol variation time reduction function ( Is output during the short-running state.

  FIG. 67 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the short time signal. As shown in FIG. 67, the time reduction signal is output when the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (during the time reduction state).

  FIG. 68 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of 4 jackpot signals. As shown in FIG. 68, the big hit four signals are output when the probability variation function is in operation (in the probability variation state).

  FIG. 69 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of three jackpot signals. As shown in FIG. 69, the three jackpot signals are output during a big hit game in which the number of continuous operations of the special variable winning ball apparatus (big prize opening) is 15 (that is, during 15 rounds of big hit game).

  FIG. 70 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the abnormal signal. As shown in FIG. 70, the abnormal signal detects an abnormal winning at the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14, a magnetic abnormality around the big winning opening, an abnormal vibration state of the gaming machine, or an abnormal opening of the big winning opening. Is output for 30 seconds. If another abnormality is detected within 30 seconds after the output of the abnormality signal is started, the abnormality signal is output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the last abnormality was detected. In the example shown in FIG. 70, when the abnormal winning is detected at the big winning opening after 30 seconds have elapsed after the output of the abnormal signal is started based on the detection of the magnetic abnormality, the last detected large An example is shown in which an abnormal signal is output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the detection of an abnormal winning at the winning opening.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the prize ball payout detection of the prize ball number count switch and the prize ball signal. As shown in FIG. 71, every time the number-of-payout counting switch 301 detects the passing of ten game balls when paying out a prize ball (specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 receives 10 pulses of the prize ball count signal). The prize ball signal (prize ball information signal) is turned on for 0.100 seconds (every time input). It should be noted that after the prize ball signal is on for 0.100 seconds, it is off for at least 0.100 seconds.

  72 to 77 are flowcharts showing the information output processing in step S30. Of the processes shown in FIGS. 72 to 77, steps S1002 to S1030 are processes for outputting the start port 1 signal, and steps S1031 to S1036 are processes for outputting the symbol determination number 1 signal. Steps S1037 to S1042 are processes for outputting two symbols of symbol determination times, and steps S1050 to S1068 are processes for outputting one big hit signal, two big hit signals, a time-short signal, four big hit signals and three big hit signals. is there. Steps S1069 to S1074 are processes for outputting an abnormal signal, and steps S1075 to S1101 are processes for outputting a prize ball information signal.

  In the information output process, the CPU 56 sets an initial value (00 (H)) in the information buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1001). Then, the address of the start port 1 information setting table is set in the pointer (step S1002), and the number of processes pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S1003). The start port 1 information setting table includes the number of processes (= 2), the start port 1 switch input bit (first start port switch input bit determination value (40 (H)), and the start port 2 switch input bit (second start port). The switch input bit determination value (80 (H)) is set In step S1003, since the pointer points to the address of the number of processes in the start port 1 information setting table, the number of processes in the start port 1 information setting table (= 2) data will be loaded.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S1004), and sets the switch-on buffer as switch input data (step S1005). Then, the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1006), and the start port switch input bit pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the start port 1 switch input bit) is loaded into the register (step S1007), and the start port 1 switch input bit and the switch input are loaded. The logical product of the data is taken (step S1008). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 40 (H), that is, when the first start port switch 13a is on, the logical product operation result is 40 (H). When the first start port switch 13a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 00 (H).

  If the logical operation result is 0 (Y in step S1009), the process proceeds to step S1015. If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S1009), it is determined that the first start winning opening 13 has been won, and the start opening 1 information storage counter is loaded into the register (step S1010). The start port 1 information storage counter is a counter that counts the number of remaining outputs of the start port 1 signal (that is, the number of remaining first winning prizes of the first start winning portion where the start port 1 signal is not output). Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1011). Then, it is confirmed whether the calculation result (added result) is not 0 (step S1012). When the calculation result is 0 (N in step S1012), 1 is subtracted from the calculation result (step S1013). Then, the calculation result is stored in the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1014).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the number of processes (step S1015), and determines whether the number of processes is not 0 (step S1015). When the number of processes is not 0 (Y in step S1016), the process proceeds to step S1004. Then, the contents of the switch-on buffer are loaded into the register (step S1004), and the switch-on buffer is set to switch input data (step S1005). Then, the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1006), the start port switch input bit pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the start port 2 switch input bit) is loaded into the register (step S1007), the start port 2 switch input bit and the switch input The logical product of the data is taken (step S1008). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 80 (H), that is, when the second start port switch 14a is on, the logical product operation result is 80 (H). When the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 00 (H). Thereafter, the processes of steps S1009 to S1016 described above are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1016 that the number of processes is 0 (N in step S1016), the CPU 56 loads the start port 1 information storage timer (step S1017), and sets the state of the start port 1 information storage timer in the flag register. It is reflected (step S1018), and it is determined whether or not the start port 1 signal is being output (step S1019). The start port 1 information storage timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (an on time 200 ms and an off time 200 ms described later) of the start port 1 signal. If the value of the start port 1 information storage timer is not 0, it is determined that the start port 1 signal is being output. If the value of the start port 1 information storage timer is 0, it is determined that the start port 1 signal is not being output. The

  If the start port 1 signal is being output (Y in step S1019), the process proceeds to step S1026. If the start port 1 signal is not being output (N in step S1019), the CPU 56 loads the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1020), and reflects the state of the start port 1 information storage counter in the flag register ( In step S1021, it is determined whether there is a remaining number of output times of the start port 1 signal (step S1022). When the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is turned on (N in step S1009), the start port 1 information storage counter is incremented by 1, so the remaining number of output times of the start port 1 signal It will be determined that there is.

  If there is no remaining number of outputs of the start port 1 signal (Y in step S1022), the process proceeds to step S1031. If there is a remaining number of output times of the start port 1 signal (N in step S1023), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1023), and the calculation result (the result of subtracting 1) is the start port 1 Store in the information storage counter (step S1024). The winning information operating time (200) is set in the register (step S1025). The winning information operating time (200) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interruption is executed 200 times, that is, a time of 0.400 seconds (400 ms).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the start port 1 information storage timer if the winning information operating time is not set in step S1025, and subtracts 1 from the winning information operating time if the winning information operating time is set in step S1025. (Step S1026). Then, the calculation result (result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the start port 1 information storage timer (step S1027).

  The CPU 56 compares the calculation result with the winning information on time (100) (step S1029), and determines whether the calculation result is shorter than the winning information on time (step S1030). The winning information ON time (100) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interruption is executed 100 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms).

  When the calculation result is not shorter than the winning information on time, that is, when the calculation result (remaining time of the start port 1 information storage timer) is longer than the winning information on time (200 ms) (N in step S1029). The CPU 56 sets the start port 1 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 0 of the output port 2 in the example shown in FIG. 8) (step S1030). When the start bit 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1103, whereby the start port 1 signal is output. It will be output from port 2.

  When the winning of the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14 (ON of the first starting port switch 13a or the second starting port switch 14a) is generated by the processing of steps S1001 to S1030 described above, the engine is started. Mouth 1 signal is output. That is, after the start port 1 signal is turned on for 200 ms, it is turned off for 200 ms. By inputting this start port 1 signal to the hall computer, it is possible to recognize the number of winnings to the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14.

  Since the start port 1 signal is turned on for 200 ms and then turned off for 200 ms, the next start is performed after the off state for 200 ms even if a start winning is continuously generated in a short time. Mouth 1 signal is output. That is, the start port 1 signal is output at an interval of at least 200 ms.

  Thus, since the start port 1 signals are output at intervals of at least 200 ms, the hall computer can reliably grasp the total number of start winnings.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the symbol determination number 1 information timer into the register (step S1031), reflects the state of the symbol determination number 1 information timer in the flag register (step S1032), and the symbol determination number 1 information timer times out. It is determined whether or not (step S1033). In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation processing (step S303), when the variation time is timed out, when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped and when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination count 1 The symbol decision count output time (0.500 seconds in this example) is set in the information timer (see step S124), and when the symbol decision count output time has not elapsed, the symbol decision count 1 information timer has timed out. When the symbol determination count output time has elapsed (when the value of the symbol determination count 1 information timer is 0), it is determined that the symbol determination count 1 information timer has timed out.

  If the symbol determination count 1 information timer has not timed out (N in step S1033), the symbol determination count 1 information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1034), and the calculation result is stored in the symbol determination count 1 information timer (step S1035). . Then, the design buffer count 1 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 1 of output port 2 in the example shown in FIG. 8) is set (step S1036). When the symbol decision number 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1103, thereby the symbol decision number 1 signal. Is output from the output port 2 (becomes ON state). If the symbol determination number 1 information timer times out (Y in step S1033), the process of step S1036 is not executed, and as a result, the symbol determination number 1 signal is turned off.

  By the above-described processing of steps S1031 to S1036, every time the variation of the first special symbol stops (stop symbol is fixed) and every time the variation of the second special symbol stops, the symbol determination number 1 signal is the number of symbol determination times. The output time (for example, 500 ms) is turned on.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the symbol determination number 2 information timer into the register (step S1037), reflects the state of the symbol determination number 2 information timer in the flag register (step S1038), and the symbol determination number 2 information timer times out. It is determined whether or not (step S1039). In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation processing (step S303), when the variation time is timed out, only when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination number 2 information timer displays the symbol determination number output time (main In the example, 0.500 seconds) is set (see steps S125 and S126), and when the symbol fixed number output time has not elapsed, it is determined that the special symbol stop information timer has not timed out, and the symbol fixed number output is output. When the time has elapsed (when the value of the symbol determination number 2 information timer is 0), it is determined that the symbol determination number 2 information timer has timed out.

  If the symbol determination count 2 information timer has not timed out (N in step S1039), the symbol determination count 2 information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1040), and the calculation result is stored in the symbol determination count 2 information timer (step S1041). . Then, the symbol fixed number 2 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 2 of output port 2 in the example shown in FIG. 8) is set (step S1042). When the symbol determination number 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1103, whereby the symbol determination number 2 signal Is output from the output port 2 (becomes ON state). If the symbol determination number 2 information timer times out (Y in step S1039), the process of step S1042 is not executed, so that the symbol determination number 2 signal is turned off.

  By the process of steps S1037 to S1042 described above, every time the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (stopped symbol is fixed), the symbol determination frequency 2 signal is turned on.

  Further, by the processing of steps S1031 to S1042 described above, the symbol determination number 1 signal is output for 0.500 seconds when the first special symbol variation is stopped and when the second special symbol variation is stopped. Further, only when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination number 2 signal is output for 0.500 seconds.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1050), compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the special winning opening opening pre-processing designation value (“5”) (step S1051), and the special symbol process flag. It is determined whether the value of is less than 5 (step S1052). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1052), the process proceeds to step S1055. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in Step S1052), the output buffer position of the jackpot of the information buffer is set (Step S1053). Further, the big output 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1054). When the big output 1 output bit position and the big output 2 output bit position of the information buffer are set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in the step S1103. One signal and two jackpot signals are output from the output port 2 (become turned on).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a special symbol high probability check process for confirming whether or not it is in a high probability state (step S1055), and determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (step S1056). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state by confirming whether or not the probability variation flag is set. When the state is a high probability state (Y in step S1056), the output buffer big hit 4 output bit position is set (step S1057). When the big output 4 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1103. Is output (becomes ON state).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a time reduction check process for confirming whether or not it is in the time reduction state (step S1058), and determines whether or not it is in the time reduction state (step S1059). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the time reduction state is established by confirming whether or not the time reduction flag is set. If the time-short state is set (Y in step S1059), the time-short output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1060). When the time-short output bit position is set, the time buffer signal is output from the output port 2 by setting the information buffer to the output value in the subsequent step S1102 and outputting the output value to the output port 2 in step S1103. (Turns on) Also, the big output 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1061). When the jackpot 2 output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1103, whereby the jackpot 2 signal is output from the output port 2. (Turns on).

  Further, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1062), compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the special winning opening opening pre-processing designation value (“5”) (step S1063), and sets the special symbol process flag. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 5 (step S1064). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1064), the process proceeds to step S1069. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in step S1064), the contents of the jackpot symbol determination buffer are loaded (step S1065), and the contents of the jackpot symbol determination buffer are compared with the high probability symbol designation value 3. (Step S1066). Here, the jackpot symbol determination buffer stores the contents of the jackpot type determined in step S73 of FIG. 30 and the contents indicating that the jackpot determination in step S62 is determined to be a jackpot, for example, “1”. Is a big hit, “2” is a probable big hit, “3” is a sudden probable big hit, and “4” is a small hit. Then, the contents of the jackpot symbol determination buffer and the high probability symbol designation value 3 are compared. If the contents of the jackpot symbol judgment buffer are not higher than the high probability symbol designation value 3 (N in step S1067), the number of rounds at the jackpot Is determined to be 15 rounds. In this case, the big output 3 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1068). When the jackpot 3 output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1103, so that the jackpot 3 signal is output from the output port 2. (Turns on).

  By the processing of steps S1050 to S1068 described above, one big hit signal, two big hit signals, a short time signal, four big hit signals and three big hit signals are output (turned on) according to the type of big hit and gaming state. .

  The hall computer inputs 1 signal of big hit and 3 signals of big hit, and can grasp which of big hit of 15 rounds and big hit of 2 rounds (sudden probability change big hit or small hit) occurred by these signals. Specifically, when one jackpot signal is on and all three jackpot signals are on (when any jackpot signal is on), it can be determined that 15 rounds of jackpot have occurred, When the big hit 1 signal is on and the big hit 3 signal is off, it can be determined that two rounds of big hit (suddenly probable big hit) or small hits have occurred. Note that a big hit signal different from the one big hit signal and the three big hit signals may be output to the hall computer so that it can be distinguished whether a sudden change probability big hit or a small hit has occurred.

  In addition, the hall computer receives four jackpot signals and a short time signal, and can grasp the gaming state based on these signals. Specifically, when the big hit 4 signal is in the on state and the short time signal is in the off state, it can be determined that the gaming state is a probabilistic state, the big hit 4 signal is in the on state, and the short time signal is also When it is in the on state, it can be determined that the gaming state is a short time state with a probable change, and when the jackpot 4 signal is in the off state and the short time signal is in the on state, it is determined that the gaming state is in the short state. When the big hit 4 signal is in the off state and the time reduction signal is also in the off state, it can be determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the abnormal signal information timer (step S1069), reflects the state of the abnormal signal information timer in the flag register (step S1070), and determines whether the abnormal signal information timer has timed out (step S1070). S1071). In the abnormality notification process (step S23), when a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) is set in the abnormal signal information timer and the predetermined time has not elapsed, it is determined that the abnormal signal information timer has not timed out. When the predetermined time has elapsed (when the value of the abnormal signal information timer is 0), it is determined that the abnormal signal information timer has timed out.

  If the abnormal signal information timer has not timed out (N in step S1071), 1 is subtracted from the abnormal signal information timer (step S1072), and the calculation result is stored in the abnormal signal information timer (step S1073). Then, the abnormal signal output bit position of the information buffer (bit 0 of the output port 3 in the example shown in FIG. 8) is set (step S1074). When the abnormal signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 2 in step S1103, whereby the abnormal signal is output from the output port 3. Is output (turns on). If the abnormal signal information timer times out (Y in step S1071), the process of step S1074 is not executed, and as a result, the abnormal signal is turned off.

  Through the processing of steps S1069 to S1074 shown above, abnormal winnings at the winning prize opening and the second starting winning opening 14, magnetic anomalies around the winning prize opening, abnormal vibration state of the gaming machine, and abnormal opening of the winning prize opening are detected. Until 30 seconds elapse, an abnormal signal is output using the common connector CN9 of the information terminal board 34. Further, when another abnormality is detected within 30 seconds after the output of the abnormality signal, the abnormality signal is output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the last abnormality was detected.

  In this embodiment, abnormality detection is performed for all of the abnormal winnings at the big winning opening and the second starting winning opening 14, the magnetic abnormality around the large winning opening, the abnormal vibration state of the gaming machine, and the abnormal opening of the special winning opening. In this case, the abnormal signal is output using the common connector CN9 of the information terminal board 34. However, it is not always necessary to output all of these abnormalities using the common connector. You may make it output using the connector of. Further, in this embodiment, the case where both the abnormal winning a prize winning opening and the abnormal winning to the second starting winning prize opening 14 are abnormally detected is output through the information terminal board 34. When only one of the abnormal winnings is detected, the information may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34.

  Further, in this embodiment, as an abnormality of the gaming machine, an abnormal winning to the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14, a magnetic abnormality around the big winning opening, an abnormal vibration state of the gaming machine, an abnormal opening of the big winning opening. Although the case where an abnormal signal is output to the outside when the game is detected is shown, the abnormal signal may be output externally based on the detection of another abnormality of the gaming machine. For example, an abnormality is detected in the game ball detection unit in the ball payout device 97, a game ball is detected at a timing other than during the payout operation of the ball payout device 97, or a game ball is clogged in the ball payout device 97 On the basis of that, an abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34. Further, for example, an abnormal signal is output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 based on the fact that the payout number count switch 301 cannot detect any game balls even though the payout operation is performed. It may be. In addition, for example, a full tank error has occurred (specifically, an ON signal has been input from the full tank switch 48), or a ball-out error has occurred (specifically, from the ball-out switch 187). An abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 based on the input of the ON signal.

  Further, for example, an abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 based on the detection that an overcurrent has flowed through the power supply circuit mounted on the gaming machine. In addition, for example, a non-connected state between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is detected, or a communication error (for example, a prize ball REQ signal communication error) between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is detected. On the basis of that, an abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34. Further, for example, based on the detection of the unconnected state between the ball payout device 97 and the payout control board 37 and the detection of a communication error between the ball payout device 97 and the payout control board 37, the information terminal board An abnormal signal may be externally output via 34. Further, for example, an abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 based on detection of an abnormality in the random number circuit 503 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal from the door opening switches 154 and 155 is output to the information terminal board 34 via the backup power supply circuit 506 without passing through the game control microcomputer 560. Although shown, the door opening signals from the door opening switches 154 and 155 may also be output as an abnormality signal by using the connector CN9 of the information terminal board 34 common to the case where other abnormality is detected.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the address of the prize ball payout number counter in the pointer (step S1075). The prize ball payout number counter is a counter that counts the pulses of the prize ball count signal from the payout control microcomputer 370. Next, the CPU 56 reads bit data of the prize ball count signal of the input port 1 (step S1076). Then, a prize ball count signal timer is loaded (step S1077). The prize ball count signal timer is a timer for determining the time during which the prize ball count signal is on.

  Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the bit data of the prize ball count signal is “1” (step S1078). If it is “1”, the prize ball count signal timer is incremented by 1 (step S1079). If it is not “1” (“0”), the prize ball count signal timer is cleared to 0 (step S1080). Next, the CPU 56 compares the prize ball count signal timer with the switch-on determination value (2) (step S1081), and determines whether or not the value of the prize ball count signal timer matches the switch-on determination value (2) ( Step S1082). If the value of the prize ball count signal timer does not match the switch-on determination value (2) (Y in step S1082), the process proceeds to step S1088. If they match (N in step S1082), it is determined that a prize ball count signal has been input (determined that a prize ball count signal has been input continuously for 4 ms), and the prize ball payout number counter is incremented by one. (Step S1083). Note that the processing of steps S1077 to S1081 is processing for confirming that the winning ball count signal has been input reliably, but the payout control microcomputer 370 also reliably performs processing similar to that of steps S1077 to S1081. You may make it confirm that the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 was input.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball payout number counter is 10 (step S1084). If the value of the winning ball payout number counter is not 10 (N in step S1084), the process proceeds to step S1088. If the value of the winning ball payout number counter is 10 (Y in step S1084), the clear data is stored in the winning ball payout number counter (step S1085). Thereby, the prize ball payout number counter is cleared. Next, the CPU 56 loads a prize ball signal output number counter (step S1086), and adds 1 to the prize ball signal output number counter (step S1087). The prize ball signal output frequency counter is a counter that counts the remaining number of prize ball signal outputs.

  Then, the CPU 56 loads a prize ball signal output timer (step S1088), reflects the state of the prize ball signal output timer in the flag register (step S1089), and determines whether or not a prize ball signal is being output. (Step S1090). The prize ball signal output timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (on time 100 ms and off time 100 ms described later) of the prize ball signal. If the value of the prize ball signal output timer is not 0, it is determined that a prize ball signal is being output. If the value of the prize ball signal output timer is 0, it is determined that no prize ball signal is being output.

  If the winning ball signal is being output (Y in step S1090), the process proceeds to step S1097. If the prize ball signal is not being output (N in step S1090), the CPU 56 loads the prize ball signal output number counter (step S1091), and reflects the state of the prize ball signal output number counter in the flag register (step S1091). S1092), it is determined whether there is a remaining number of output of the prize ball signal (step S1093).

  If there is no remaining number of prize ball signals output (Y in step S1093), the process proceeds to step S1102. If there is a remaining number of prize ball signal outputs (N in Step S1093), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the prize ball signal output number counter (Step S1094), and outputs the result of the computation (the result of 1 subtraction) as a prize ball signal output. Store in the number counter (step S1095). Then, the game information signal operation operation time (100) is set in the register (step S1096). The game information signal operating time (100) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interruption is executed 100 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms).

  Next, if the game information signal operating time is not set in step S1096, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the prize ball signal output timer. If the game information signal operating time is set in step S1096, the CPU 56 sets the game information signal operating time. 1 is subtracted (step S1097). Then, the calculation result (the result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the prize ball signal output timer (step S1098).

  The CPU 56 compares the calculation result (remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer) with the game information signal output time determination value (50) (step S1099), and the remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer is the game information signal output time determination value. It is determined whether the time is shorter than (50) (step S1100). The game information signal output time determination value (50) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interrupt is executed 50 times, that is, a time of 0.100 seconds (100 ms).

  When the remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer is not shorter than the game information signal output time determination value, that is, the remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer is longer than the game information signal output time determination value (100 ms). In this case (N in Step S1100), the CPU 56 sets the prize ball output bit position of the information buffer (bit 1 of the output port 3 in the example shown in FIG. 8) (Step S1101). When the prize ball output bit position of the information buffer is set, the prize buffer signal is output from the output port 3 by setting the information buffer to the output value in step S1102 and outputting the output value to the output port 3 in step S1103. Is done.

  With the processing of steps S1075 to S1101 described above, a prize ball signal is output to the hall computer every time the prize ball count signal is counted ten times. That is, a prize ball signal is output to the hall computer every time 10 prize balls are paid out (10 pulses per pulse). Therefore, the hall computer can recognize the number of game balls paid out by the gaming machine.

  The definition of the above signals (contents that are meant when the signal is in an on state) is an example, and different definitions may be used as long as the difference in jackpot type or gaming state can be recognized in the hall computer. Further, the number and types of signals are not limited to those described above.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means by the payout control microcomputer 370 will be described. FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the payout control microcomputer 370. As shown in FIG. 78, the output port 0 is an output port for outputting a signal of each phase supplied to the payout motor 289 by the stepping motor. The output port 1 is an output port for outputting a payout error signal, a ball out signal, a full tank signal, and a prize ball count signal to the game control microcomputer 560. The output port 2 is an output port for outputting each segment of the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED. The output port 3 is an output port for outputting a PRDY signal and an EXS signal to the card unit 50. The output ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 correspond to the output ports 372a, 372b, 372c, and 372d shown in FIG.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of input port bit assignment in the payout control microcomputer 370. As shown in FIG. 79, a 4-bit prize ball number signal is inputted to bits 0 to 3 of the input port 0, and a prize ball REQ from the main board 31 is inputted to bits 4, 5, 6 and 7, respectively. A signal, a power confirmation signal from the main board 31, a detection signal from the ball break switch 187, and a detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 295 are input. In addition, the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301, the operation signal from the error release switch 375, and the detection signal of the full switch 48 are input to bits 1 to 3 of the input port 1, respectively. The VL signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal from the card unit 50 are input to bits 4 to 6 of the input port 1, respectively. The output port 2 receives a power-off signal and a clear signal from the power supply board. The input ports 0, 1 and 2 correspond to the input ports 372e and 372f shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a payout control process executed by the payout control means (the payout control microcomputer 370). The payout control process is executed by a timer interrupt process based on a timer interrupt generated every 2 ms, for example. In the payout control process, the payout control CPU 371 (the payout control microcomputer 370) first performs an input determination process (step S752). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of the input port 0 and the input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in predetermined 2 bytes of RAM (referred to as an input state flag). In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of the input port 0 and the input port 1, the state of the input state flag is checked instead of directly checking the state of the input port. In the input determination process, the payout control CPU 371 also performs a process of transmitting the input data of the input ports 0 and 1 to the main board 31.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a payout motor control process (step S753). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Also, the payout control CPU 371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 50 (step S754). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes main control communication processing for communicating with the game control means of the main board 31 (step S755). Further, a prize ball lending control process for performing a control to pay out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 50 and a control for paying out the number of award balls indicated by a prize ball number signal from the main board. Is executed (step S756).

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S757). Further, the payout control CPU 371 executes display control processing for performing a predetermined display on the error display LED 374 according to the result of the error processing (step S758).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer, and output port 3 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer, and output port 3 buffer are a payout motor control process (step S753), a prepaid card unit control process (step S754), a main control communication process (step S755), and information output. It is updated in the process (step S758) and the display control process (step S759).

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the main control communication process in step S755. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes one of steps S1531 to S1533 in accordance with the value of the main control communication control code.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing main control communication normal processing (step S1531) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is zero. In the main control communication normal processing, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs processing without executing the subsequent processing when the error bit (main control unconnected error bit or prize ball REQ signal error bit) is on. Is finished (step S1541). In step S1541, if any one of the two bits in the error flag is set, it is determined that the error bit is set.

  If the BRDY signal is on, the payout control microcomputer 370 ends the process without executing the subsequent processes (step S1542). That the BRDY signal is on means that a ball lending request is generated from the card unit 50. That is, when a ball lending request is generated, communication with the game control means of the main board 31 (communication relating to prize ball payout) does not proceed.

  If the conditions of steps S1541 to S1542 are not satisfied and the power supply confirmation signal is on, the payout control CPU 371 confirms whether or not the prize ball REQ signal is on (steps S1543 and S1544). . If the prize ball number signal is on, the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number signal is added to the contents of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S1545), and the process for turning on the prize ball BUSY signal is performed. (Step S1546). Specifically, the bit corresponding to the prize ball BUSY signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the on state. Then, the winning ball BUSY signal output time (10 in this example) is set in the main control communication control timer (step S1547), the value of the main control communication control code is set to 1 (step S1548), and the process is terminated. The main control communication control timer is a timer used for monitoring the time related to communication with the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. At this stage, the timing for turning off the prize ball BUSY signal is set. The award ball BUSY signal output time is set. The prize ball unpaid-out number counter is formed in a non-volatile (power-backed up in this example) RAM area.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing main control communication processing (step S1532) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 1. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the state of the prize ball REQ signal (step S1552) if the power confirmation signal is on (step S1551). If the prize ball REQ signal is off, the prize ball REQ signal error bit in the error flag is set (step S1553). This is because it is strange that the prize ball REQ signal is immediately turned off at this stage.

  Next, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the value of the main control communication control timer (step S1554), and if not 0, subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S1555) and ends the process. To do. If the value of the main control communication control timer is 0, processing for turning off the prize ball BUSY signal is performed. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the prize ball BUSY signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the OFF state (step S1556). Also, a prize ball REQ signal OFF monitoring time (24 in this example) is set in the main control communication control timer (step S1557). Then, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 2 (step S1558), and the process ends.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing main control communication end processing (step S1533) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 2. In the main control communication process, if the error bit (main control unconnected error bit or prize ball REQ signal error bit) is on, the payout control microcomputer 370 proceeds to step S1567 (step S1561). . Also when the power confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S1567 (step S1562). If both error bits are off and the power confirmation signal is on, it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball REQ signal is off (step S1563). When it is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1567.

  If the prize ball REQ signal is not turned off, the value of the main control communication control timer is confirmed (step S1564). If the value of the main control communication control timer is not 0, the value of the main control communication control timer is decremented by 1 (step S1565). If the value of the main control communication control timer is 0, it is determined that the prize ball REQ signal has not been turned off within the monitoring time, and the prize ball REQ signal error bit is set in the error flag (step S1566). Transition.

  In step S1567, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 0, and the process ends.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the winning ball lending control process in step S756. In the winning ball lending control process, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on (Y in step S1601). The value of the payout number counter is decremented by 1 (Y in step S1602, S1604), and if the ball is not being lent, the value of the unsold prize ball number counter is decremented by 1 (N in step S1602, S1603). Next, the payout ball detection bit of the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set (step S1605). The payout ball detection bit is a game regardless of whether the payout motor 289 is driven in one payout ball payout process (up to 15 balls) or one ball lending process (25 payouts) in the payout passing waiting process. This is used to detect that no sphere has passed through the payout number counting switch 301. Thereafter, any one of steps S1610 to S1612 is executed according to the value of the payout control code.

  In the winning ball lending control process, when checking the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 or subtracting the unpaid number counter, the error bit check is not executed. Therefore, even if an error state relating to the payout of game balls is detected, every time a payout of game balls is detected by the payout number count switch 301, if the payout game balls are loaned balls, a ball rental unpaid number counter 1 is subtracted, and if it is a prize ball, a process of subtracting 1 from the prize ball unpaid number counter is executed. Therefore, even if an error related to payout occurs, the number of unpaid game balls can be managed accurately. That is, a game ball paid out from the ball payout device 97 before the payout control microcomputer 370 detects the occurrence of an error is detected by the payout number count switch 301 slightly after the payout time. However, when the payout control microcomputer 370 detects the occurrence of an error after the game ball is paid out from the ball payout device 97 and before the game ball is detected by the payout number count switch 301, The game balls paid out from the ball payout device 97 before detecting the occurrence of an error can be reflected in the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the payout start waiting process (step S1610) executed when the payout control code is 0. In the payout start waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 does not execute the subsequent process if an error bit (one or more of all error bits in the error flag) is set (step S1621). The error flag is formed in the RAM.

  On the other hand, if the BRDY signal is not in the ON state, the process for paying out a prize ball after step S1631 is executed. If the BRDY signal is on and the BRQ signal, which is a ball lending request signal, is on, a ball lending operation flag is set (steps S1623 and S1624). Then, “25” is set in the unpaid ball lending number counter (step S1625), and “25” is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S1626).

  The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer.

  Thereafter, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets a value (specifically “1”) corresponding to the payout motor start preparation process in the payout motor control code for selecting the process executed in the payout motor control process. (Step S1627), the value of the payout control code is set to 1 (step S1628), and the process is terminated.

  In the payout motor control processing, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs payout motor normal processing (processing such as setting a pointer at the head address of a table stored in the ROM) according to the value of the payout motor control code. Dispensing motor start preparation processing (processing such as setting initial value of excitation pattern in bits 4 to 7 of port 0 buffer corresponding to output state of output port 0), dispensing motor slow-up processing (smoothing dispensing motor 289) In order to start rotation, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table are read out at an interval longer than that in the case of constant speed processing and gradually approaching the time interval in the case of constant speed processing, and output port 0 Processing of setting to bits 4 to 7 of the port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output), dispensing motor constant speed processing (periodic dispensing) The data excitation pattern table is read and the port 0 buffer bits 4 to 7 corresponding to the output state of the output port 0 are set), the payout motor brake process (to smoothly stop the payout motor 289) Read out the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at a time interval that is longer than the constant speed processing and gradually away from the time interval in the constant speed processing, and corresponds to the output state of the output port 0 And processing for setting bits 4 to 7 in the port 0 buffer) and ball motor payout motor brake processing (in the case of rotation for releasing ball biting, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table are read and output port) (Processing set to bits 4 to 7 of the port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of 0).

  In step S1631, the payout control microcomputer 370 checks whether or not the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is 0 (step S1631). If 0, the process ends. The award ball unpaid-out counter is a value other than 0 when the communication related to the payout command signal is normally completed with the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 in the main control communication end process. The number indicated by the prize ball number signal) is added. If the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether it is 15 or more (step S1632). If it is less than 15, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer (step S1633), and if it is 15 or more, “15” is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer (step S1634). . Then, a winning ball moving flag is set (step S1635), and the process proceeds to step S1627.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the payout motor stop waiting process (step S1611) executed when the payout control code is 1. In the payout motor stop waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 370 checks whether or not the payout operation is completed (step S1641).

  When the payout operation is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets the payout passing monitoring time in the payout control monitoring timer (step S1642). The payout passing monitoring time is a time that has a margin in the time from when the last payout ball is paid out by the payout motor 289 until it passes through the payout number count switch 301. Then, the value of the payout control code is set to 2 (step S1643), and the process ends.

  88 to 90 are flowcharts showing the payout passing waiting process (step S1612) executed when the value of the payout control code is 2. In the payout passing waiting process, when a prize ball is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is zero. If the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is not 0, if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball is tried up to 2 times. In the re-payout operation, when it is detected by the payout number count switch 301 that the game ball is actually paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally. In this embodiment, the maximum number of game balls to be paid out in one prize ball payout operation is 15, and if the prize ball number signal is received during the prize ball payout, the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is received. Therefore, even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the award ball non-payout number counter may not be 0.

  Further, when the ball lending is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the ball lending unpaid-out counter is 0. If the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, and if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball or the remaining number of ball lending (corresponding to the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter) Try. In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out in one ball lending and payout operation is 25 (fixed value), and the payout motor 289 is rotated so that 25 game balls are paid out. Therefore, when the value of the unpaid ball lending counter is not 0, the payout has not been completed normally.

  In the payout passing waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 370 first checks the value of the payout control timer, and if the value is 0, the process proceeds to step S1653 (step S1650). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0, the value of the payout control timer is decremented by 1 (step S1651). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0 (step S1652), that is, if the payout control timer has not timed out, the process is terminated.

  If the payout control timer has timed out (step S1652), it is confirmed whether or not a ball lending payout process (ball lending operation) has been executed (step S1653). Whether or not the ball lending operation has been executed is confirmed by whether or not the ball lending operation bit in the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set (see steps S1623 and S1624). When the ball lending operation is not executed, that is, when the prize ball payout process (prize ball operation) is executed, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the value of the award ball unpaid number counter ( Step S1654). When the value of the winning ball unpaid-out counter is 0, it is determined that the winning ball payout process has been completed normally, and the payout ball detection bit in the payout control state flag, 1 bit during re-payout operation, and during re-payout operation 2 bits, the winning ball operating flag and the ball lending operating bit are reset (step S1655), the payout control code is set to 0 (step S1656), and the processing is terminated. This bit is set when the switch 301 is turned on, and indicates that the payout number counting switch 301 has detected at least one game ball during the payout operation. Further, 1 bit during the re-payout operation and 2 bits during the re-payout operation are control bits used when executing a re-payout process including two re-payout operations.

  If the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is not 0, the payout control microcomputer 370 indicates an error flag (specifically, 1 bit for a payout switch error, 2 bits for a payout switch error, and a payout case). Re-payout operation on condition that any one or a plurality of error bits) is not set (step S1659), and on the condition that payout ball detection bit is not set (step S1661) Execute. If the error flag is set, the re-payout operation is not executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the unpaid prize ball number counter may not be 0. Therefore, if the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of at least one game ball during the prize ball payout process, it is assumed that the prize ball payout process is normally completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1655. For example, when 15 game balls should be paid out in one prize ball payout process, when only 14 game balls are actually paid out (the number of payout count switch 301 is 14 game balls). In this case, the payout ball detection bit is set, so it is considered that the award ball payout process has been completed normally. It should not have been done, and the shortage will be paid out in the next prize ball payout process, so there will be no disadvantage to the player.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control microcomputer 370 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S1662). If not set, it is checked whether 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S1663). If 1 bit is not set during re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S1664), and 1 bit is set during re-payout operation (step S1665). ), The value of the re-payout operation number or ball lending unpaid-out number counter is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S1666). The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer. In step S1666, the value of the unpaid ball lending number counter is also handled because step S1666 is used in the re-payout process in the lend-out process. That is, in step S1666, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets the re-payout operation number in the re-payout process in the winning ball payout process, and sets the value of the unpaid-out number counter in the ball lend in the re-payout process in the ball lending payout process. set. Thereafter, the payout control code is set to 1 (step S1667), and the process is terminated.

  When it is confirmed in step S1663 that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 370 sets 1 as the number of re-payout operations in order to execute the second re-payout (step S1663). In step S1668, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S1669), and 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation (step S1670). Then, control goes to a step S1666.

  If it is confirmed in step S1662 that 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 370 does not pay out the game ball even if the re-payout process is executed twice (the number of payouts). Assuming that the count switch 301 has not detected a game ball), the payout case error bit in the error flag is set (step S1672). At that time, 2 bits are reset during the re-payout operation (step S1671). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if no game balls are paid out even if two re-payout operations are performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process), it is determined that the game ball payout operation is defective and the payout number count switch is not A passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the payout control microcomputer 370 detects that the game ball has not been paid out based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 as the payout detection means, Control is performed so that the payout means pays out one game ball up to a predetermined number of times (in this example, twice) as a limit. In this embodiment, if the game ball is not paid out even if the retry operation for paying out the game ball is performed twice, the payout case error bit is set and an error is being generated. (Step S1672), the payout case error bit may be set when it is detected for the first time that the game ball has not been paid out. Note that “retry operation (or“ retry ”,“ retry operation processing ”) means that the actual number of payouts is equal to the number of game balls paid out in spite of execution of a normal payout process. This is an operation to be executed when the amount is small, and means an operation for executing the payout process again in order to pay out unpaid game balls separately from the normal payout process.

  In the prize ball lending control process, the error bit is checked to determine whether or not to perform a payout operation (one prize ball payout or one ball lending). The payout start shown in FIG. Only in the waiting process. In the payout motor stop waiting process shown in FIG. 87 and the payout passing wait process shown in FIG. 88 and the like, the error bit is not checked. Note that the error bit is also checked in step S1659 and the like in the payout passing waiting process, but this check is for determining whether or not a re-payout operation is performed, and is a payout operation (single prize ball payout or 1 This is not to determine whether or not to start ball lending. Therefore, after the process of step S1626, S1633 or step S1634 is performed and the game ball payout process is started, the payout process is not interrupted even if an error occurs. In other words, when an error occurs, the game ball payout process is continued until a point at which the game ball can be cut well (at the time when one prize ball payout or one ball lending ends). The error bits in the error flag checked in step S1621 include an error bit indicating that the power supply confirmation signal from the main board 31 has been turned off. Therefore, even when the power supply confirmation signal is turned off, the game ball payout process is stopped at a time when the turn is good.

  When it is confirmed in step S1653 that the ball lending / dispensing process (ball lending operation) has been executed, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms whether or not the value of the lending / unpaid number counter is 0 (step). S1657). If it is 0, it is determined that the ball lending / dispensing process is normally completed, and the process proceeds to step S1655.

  In step S1657, if the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, an error flag (specifically, any one of the payout switch error error 1 bit, the payout switch error error 2 bit, and the payout case error bit) Or one bit or a plurality of bits) is not set (step S1675), and the re-payout process is executed. If the error flag is set, the re-payout process is not executed.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control microcomputer 370 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S1676). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S1677). If 1 bit is not set during re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S1678), and 1 bit is set during re-payout operation (step S1679). ) After further resetting the payout ball detection bit (step S1680), the process proceeds to step S1666.

  In step S1677, when it is confirmed that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 370 performs a process for executing the re-payout operation again. Specifically, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S1681). If the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the game ball is paid out in the first re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S1683. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, the process proceeds to step S1684 to execute the second re-payout operation.

  In step S1683, the payout ball detection bit is reset, and then the process proceeds to step S1666. Therefore, in this case, since 1 bit remains set during the re-payout operation, the first (first) re-payout operation is performed again. In step S1684, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations (step S1684), 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S1684), and the process proceeds to step S1666.

  In step S1676, when it is confirmed that 2 bits during the re-payout operation are set, the payout control microcomputer 370 resets 2 bits during the re-payout operation (step S1686), and the payout ball detection bit is set. In other words, if the game ball has been paid out by the re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S1683 and an attempt is made to eliminate the remaining unpaid portion. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, it is determined that the game ball has not been paid out even if the re-payout process is executed twice (the payout number count switch 301 has not detected a game ball). A payout case error bit is set (step S1688). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if one game ball is not paid out even if two re-payout operations are continuously performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process) related to the ball lending process, a game ball payout operation is performed. As a failure, a payout count switch non-passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set. In this embodiment, the ball lending control process is executed with priority over the prize ball control process (the process after step S1631) (see step S1622), but the prize ball control process is performed over the ball lending control process. Priority may be given to execution.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display area is executed (step S708). In addition, a random number update process for updating each random number for determining a design, an effect, and the like is executed (step S709). Further, a notification control process for performing notification using an effect device such as the effect display device 9 is executed (step S710). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 changes either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol based on the symbol variation designation command received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the common ornament symbol display control process. And control to output a display signal to the decorative symbol displays 9a and 9b corresponding to the specified decorative symbol.

  FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 19 and 20) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  93 to 96 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (background specifying command: 9500 (H) to 9503 (H)) for specifying the background in the effect display device 9 (Y in step S614), the effect control CPU 101 It is confirmed whether or not the received effect control command is a chance mode state background designation command (step S615A). If it is a chance mode state background designation command, the effect control CPU 101 executes control to display the background in the chance mode state as the background (background image, background color, etc.) of the effect display device 9 (step S615B).

  If it is not the chance mode state background designation command, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the restoration background change flag is set (step S615C). The recovery background change flag is set when a high base state (short time state or probability change state) is specified in the power failure gaming state designation command transmitted at the time of power failure recovery (see steps S636 to S638). When the restoration background change flag is set (Y in step S615C), a control for displaying the background in the short time state as the background (background image, background color, etc.) of the effect display device 9 is executed (step S615D). On the other hand, when the recovery background change flag is not set (N in step S615C), the effect control CPU 101 sets a background display state flag corresponding to the content of the background designation command (step S615E). Specifically, if the background specification command is the normal state background specification command, the background display state flag in the normal state is set, and if the background specification command is the probability change state background specification command, the background display state in the probability change state The flag is set, and if the background designation command is the time reduction state background designation command, the background display state flag in the time reduction state is set.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S616), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S617). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 stores the display result specifying command in a display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM (step S620). .

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot start 1-4 designation commands (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flag (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S629), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen indicating that the initialization process has been executed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed (step S630). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Further, an initial notification flag is set (step S631), and a value corresponding to the initial notification period value is set in the period timer (step S632). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of the initialization designation command. The effect control CPU 101 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in step S45. Therefore, the abnormality notification designation command is not received when the initialization notification is performed.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received production control command is a power failure gaming state designation command (step S636), the production control CPU 101 determines that the gaming state designated by the power failure gaming state designation command is a high base state (time reduction state or probability change). It is checked whether or not (state) (step S637). If it is in the high base state, the recovery background change flag is set (step S638). As described above, when the recovery background change flag is set, the background of the effect display device 9 is in the short-time state regardless of the gaming state designated by the background designation command transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 560 thereafter. (See steps S615C and S615D).

  If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot end 1-3 designation commands (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets one of the jackpot end 1-3 designation command reception flags (step S642).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal winning notification designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is a start abnormal winning notification designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a start abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received production control command is a magnetic abnormality notification designation command (step S647), the production control CPU 101 sets a magnetic abnormality notification designation command reception flag (step S648).

  If the received effect control command is a vibration abnormality notification designation command (step S649), the effect control CPU 101 sets a vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag (step S650).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal opening notification designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal opening notification designation command reception flag (step S652).

  If the received production control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S653), the presentation control CPU 101 uses the second byte data (EXT data) of the combined pending storage number designation command as a combined pending storage number storage area. (Step S654). If the CPU 101 for effect control receives the same total pending storage number designation command twice without receiving the total pending storage count subtraction designation command, it discards the first total pending storage count designation command received. (For example, the total pending storage number storage area is once cleared, and the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command received second time may be stored in the total pending storage number storage area.

  If the received effect control command is the first start winning designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 sets the first start winning flag (step S656). If the received effect control command is the second start winning designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 sets the second start winning flag (step S658). If the received effect control command is a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S659), the effect control CPU 101 sets a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag (step S660).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S661). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  In addition, in step S219 of FIG. 25, instead of the process of transmitting the combined reserved memory number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, a reserved memory number designation command indicating the number of reserved memories indicated by the start port pointer is transmitted. If configured as described above, in step S654, processing for storing the reserved storage number designation command in a predetermined storage area (holding storage number storage area) is performed.

  In addition, in step S219 in FIG. 25, when it is configured not to perform the process of transmitting the total pending storage number designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, in the case of N of step S651, the process of step S655 is performed. Transition. Then, the production control CPU 101 recognizes whether the first start prize or the second start prize has occurred based on the contents of the start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command). (Steps S655 and S657) When the first start winning is recognized, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is updated (updated to data corresponding to the value indicating the current total pending storage number). Then, the value of the first start winning counter is incremented by one. Further, when it is recognized that the second start winning is generated, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is updated and the value of the second start winning counter is incremented by one. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to transmit the total pending storage number designation command, the number of commands can be reduced, and the processing load on the CPU 56 and the effect control CPU 101 can be reduced.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol (first ornament symbol or second ornament symbol) and the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the production control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol or second decorative symbol) and the production symbol Control is performed to stop the fluctuation and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit (including the notification of the occurrence of the big hit). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening opening designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S806).

  Big hit end processing (step S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S821).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S822). If the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is reset (step S823), and the first ornament symbol variation indicating that the variation of the first ornament symbol is started. A request flag is set (step S824). Then, for example, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the decorative symbol switching timer for determining the switching timing of the lighting LED (step S825). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S828.

  If the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set, the second symbol variation designation command reception flag should be set. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 resets the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (step S826A), and sets the second symbol variation request flag indicating that the variation of the second symbol variation is started (step S826B). At the same time, a second reserved memory number subtraction flag indicating that the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 is set (step S826C). Then, for example, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the decorative symbol switching timer for determining the switching timing of the lighting LED (step S827). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S828.

  In step S828, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol to be derived and displayed when the change is stopped, based on the contents of the received display result specifying command, the contents of the change pattern command, and the like. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control includes a process table (display control execution data for executing display control of the effect display device 9, lamp control execution data for executing lamp lighting control, and speaker 27 according to the effect control pattern (variation pattern). (Sound number data for controlling the voice output) and a table in which a plurality of process data composed of process timer set values in which the time for executing each control is set are selected (step S831). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the process timer setting value in the process data of the selected process table (data constituting the process table) to the process timer and starts the process timer (step S834).

  The effect control CPU 101 indicates an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (an abnormal winning notification flag, a starting abnormal winning notification flag, a magnetic abnormality notification flag, a vibration abnormality notification flag, or an abnormal release notification flag). ) Is not set, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) Control of various lamps as parts and speaker 27 as an effect part is executed (steps S835A and S835B). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  When the abnormality notification flag is set, the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 (steps S835A and S835C). That is, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of the production symbol is started, a sound production according to the variable display is not executed, but an abnormality notification (abnormal winning) And a start abnormality winning notification, a magnetic abnormality notification, a vibration abnormality notification, and an abnormal release notification) are continuously output.

  In addition, when performing the process of step S835C, the effect control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. That is, the display at that time on the effect display device 9 (notification of abnormal winning, notification of abnormal start of winning, notification of magnetic abnormality, notification of vibration abnormality, notification of abnormal release) and variable display of the effect symbol. The display effect image is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 9 at the same time. That is, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of the effect symbol is started, only the display effect corresponding to the variable display is not executed, but the abnormality notification (abnormal The display according to the winning notification, the start abnormal winning notification, the magnetic abnormality notification, the vibration abnormality notification, and the abnormal release notification) is also continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S836), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation process (step S802). (Step S837).

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation processing (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S842).

  When the process timer times out (Y in step S843), the process data is switched (step S844). At this time, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer. Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the next process timer (step S845). Then, on condition that the abnormality notification flag (abnormal winning notification flag, start abnormal winning notification flag, magnetic abnormality notification flag, vibration abnormality notification flag or abnormal release notification flag) is not set, the next Is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set in (Steps S846, S847A).

  When the abnormality informing flag is set, the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, note number data i is excluded) (step S846). , S847B). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the sound production according to the variable display of the production symbol is not executed, but the abnormality notification (abnormal winning notification, start abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality The sound output corresponding to the notification, the vibration abnormality notification, and the abnormal release notification) is continued.

  In addition, when the process of step S847B is performed, the CPU 101 for effect control does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. . Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, only the display effect corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbol is not executed, but an abnormality notification (notification of abnormal winning or start abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality) Display, notification of vibration abnormality, notification of abnormal release) is also continued.

  If “second probability change” is specified in the display result specifying command (that is, if it is specified that the non-probability variable symbol is promoted to the probability variable symbol during the change), the promotion effect is made in steps S847A and S847B. Is executed.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S848), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S850). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S849), the process proceeds to step S850. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmed command reception flag is set (step S851). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, the confirmed command reception flag is reset. In step S852, control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol in accordance with the data stored in the effect symbol display result storage area (data indicating the stop symbol) (step S853). Also, an effect symbol variation end flag is set (step S854). Then, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (step S855). Whether it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit is confirmed, for example, by a display result specifying command stored in the display result specifying command storage area. In this embodiment, it can be confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit according to the determined stop symbol.

  If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S856).

  If it is determined not to win, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S857).

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the effect symbol and the effect symbol variation (variable display) on condition that the symbol confirmation designation command is received (see steps S851 and S853). However, if the variation time timer based on the received variation pattern command times out, the effect symbol and the variation of the effect symbol may be controlled to end without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of variable display.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flag indicating that any of the jackpot start 1-4 designation commands has been received is set (step S871). If any one of the big hit start 1 to 4 designation command reception flags is set, control is performed to display a game start screen corresponding to the set flag on the effect display device 9 (step S872). Further, the set flag (one of the big hit start 1-4 designation command reception flags) is reset (step S873). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805) (step S874).

  In step S872, if the big hit start 2 designation command is received, the production control CPU 101 performs a control to display a screen for informing the start of the small hit game on the production display device 9. When the jackpot start 1 designation command or jackpot start 3 designation command is received, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying the start of the jackpot game (different from the screen for notifying the start of the jackpot game). Control to display on the screen. And when the big hit start 4 designation | designated command is received, control which displays the screen which alert | reports the start of a sudden probability change big hit game on the effect display apparatus 9 is performed. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the screen for informing the start of the small hit game and the screen for informing the start of the sudden probability change big hit game are the same screen.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot end effect timer is set (step S880). If the big hit end effect timer is set, the process proceeds to step S885. If the jackpot end effect timer is not set, whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag (one of the jackpot end 1 to 3 designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is set Confirmation is made (step S881). When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set, the jackpot end designation command reception flag is reset (step S882), and a value corresponding to the jackpot end display time is set in the jackpot end presentation timer (step S883). Then, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a jackpot end screen (screen for notifying the end of the jackpot game) (step S884). Specifically, an instruction to display the big hit end screen is given to the VDP 109.

  In the case of a small hit, since the big hit end designation command is not received, the CPU 101 for effect control does not execute steps S881 and S882, and the value corresponding to the small hit end display time is directly displayed in the big hit end effect timer. Is set (see step S883), and the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a small hit end screen (screen for informing the end of the small hit game) (see step S884). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) based on the fact that the effect period of the small hit end display has elapsed (see step S894). .

  In step S885, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end effect timer. Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed (step S886). If not, the process ends. When the jackpot end effect time has elapsed and the jackpot end 1 designation command is received (Y in step S889), that is, when the effect control command for designating the normal jackpot end is received. The effect control CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (100 times) in the effect time reduction counter (step S890). The effect short-time counter is a counter that counts the short-time number (100 times) after the end of the normal big hit on the effect control CPU 101 side. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S894).

  When the big hit end 1 designation command is received (N in step S889), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). (Step S894).

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol display control process of step S706 in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the first decorative symbol display control process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first decorative symbol changing flag is set (step S781). If the first decorative symbol variation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S785. If the first decorative symbol variation flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the first decorative symbol variation request flag is set (step S782). If the first decorative symbol variation request flag is set, the first decorative symbol variation request flag is reset (step S783), and the first decorative symbol variation flag is set (step S784).

  In step S785, it is confirmed whether or not the decorative symbol variation end flag is set. If the decorative symbol variation end flag is set, the decorative symbol variation end flag is reset (step S786), and the display result is displayed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a according to the data stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area. Is displayed (step S791), and the first decorative symbol variation flag is reset (step S792).

  If the decorative symbol change end flag is not set, the value of the decorative symbol switching timer is decremented by 1 (step S787). If the value of the decorative symbol switching timer is 0 (step S788), that is, if it is the lighting LED switching timing, the LED to be lit on the first decorative symbol display 9a is switched (step S789), and the decorative symbol is switched. For example, a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is reset in the switching timer (step S790). In steps S825 and S827, it is not necessary to execute the process of resetting a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the decorative symbol switching timer.

  By the control as described above, the LEDs that are turned on in the first decorative symbol display 9a are switched every 0.5 seconds, for example, and variable display of the first decorative symbol is realized.

  Note that the program of the second decorative symbol display control process (step S707) is configured in the same manner as the first decorative symbol display control process. That is, in the above description of the first decorative symbol display control process, if “first” is read as “second”, the second decorative symbol display control process will be described.

  The first decorative symbol display control process (step S706) and the second decorative symbol display control process (step S707) may be common processes. In this case, for the process of resetting a flag such as the first decorative symbol changing flag (steps S781 to S784, S786), it is necessary to provide a process for the first decorative symbol and a process for the second decorative symbol separately. However, the processes in steps S785, S787 to S792 can be made common. For example, depending on whether the first decorative symbol changing flag is set or the second decorative symbol changing flag is set, a corresponding LED (first decorative symbol display 9a or second decorative symbol display 9b) is displayed. Control to output a display control signal is executed.

  105 to 107 are explanatory diagrams illustrating examples of notification screens displayed on the effect display device 9. FIG. 105 (A) shows an example of an initial screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the initialization designation command. FIG. 105 (B) shows an example of the power failure recovery screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the power failure recovery designation command.

  FIG. 106 (C) shows an example of an abnormality notification screen (screen for notifying an abnormal winning to the big winning opening) that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the abnormal winning notification designation command. It is shown that the display of the abnormality notification screen is continued even if the change of the production symbol is started (see the right side of FIG. 106C). In FIG. 106 (D), the effect control CPU 101 notifies the start abnormality notification screen (the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14) displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the start abnormal winning notification designation command. An example of the screen) is shown, and it is shown that the display of the start abnormality notification screen is continued even if the variation of the effect design is started (see the right side of FIG. 106 (D)).

  FIG. 107 (E) shows a magnetic abnormality notification screen (screen for notifying the detection of magnetic abnormality around the big prize opening) that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the magnetic abnormality notification designation command. An example is shown, and it is shown that the display of the magnetic abnormality notification screen is continued even if the change of the production symbol is started (see the right side of FIG. 107 (E)). FIG. 107 (F) shows an example of a vibration abnormality notification screen (screen for notifying the vibration abnormality state of the gaming machine) that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the vibration abnormality notification designation command. It is shown that the display of the vibration abnormality notification screen is continued even if the change of the production symbol is started (see the right side of FIG. 107 (F)). FIG. 107 (G) shows an example of an abnormal release notification screen (screen for notifying abnormal opening of the big prize opening) that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the abnormal release notification designation command. It is shown that the display of the abnormal release notification screen is continued even when the change of the effect design is started (see the right side of FIG. 107 (G)).

  108 and 109 are flowcharts showing the notification control process in step S710. In the notification control process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1901). The initial notification flag is set when an initialization designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (see step S631 in FIG. 94). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1906. If the initial notification flag is set, the value of the period timer set in step S632 is decremented by 1 (step S1902). Then, when the value of the period timer becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (steps S1903 and S1904).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the effect display device 9 (step S1905). The VDP 109 erases the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the effect display device 9 according to the command.

  In step S1906, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not an abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag indicating that an abnormal winning notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1911. If the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1907), and the effect display device 9 has an abnormality with respect to the screen displayed at that time. A command to superimpose and display the winning notification screen is output to the VDP 109 (step S1908). In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays an abnormal winning notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 106C).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1909). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, thereafter, sound output (output of an abnormal notification sound) is performed in accordance with the notification of abnormal winning to the special winning opening. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets an abnormal winning notification flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification to the special winning opening is being made (step S1910), and the process proceeds to step S1911.

  In step S1911, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not a start abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag indicating that a start abnormality prize notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1917. If the abnormal start winning notification designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal start winning notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1912). Further, it is confirmed whether or not the abnormal winning notification flag is set (step S1913). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1917. That is, when an abnormal winning notification is already made to the special winning opening, control is performed so that the abnormal winning notification is preferentially executed. If the abnormal winning notification flag is not set, the effect display device 9 outputs to the VDP 109 a command to superimpose the start abnormal winning notification screen on the screen displayed at that time (step S1914). In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays the start abnormal winning notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 106D).

  Furthermore, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1915). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, after that, sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) is performed in response to the notification of abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a start abnormal winning notification in-progress flag indicating that the second winning winning opening 14 is notified of an abnormal winning (step S1916), and proceeds to step S1917.

  In step S1917, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a magnetic abnormality notification designation command reception flag indicating that a magnetic abnormality notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process shifts to step S1923. If the magnetic abnormality notification designation command reception flag is set, the magnetic abnormality notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1918). Further, it is confirmed whether any abnormality notification flag (abnormal prize notification flag or start abnormal prize notification flag) is set (step S1919). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1923. That is, when an abnormal winning notification is already made to the big winning opening or the second start winning opening 14, the control is performed so that the abnormal winning notification is preferentially executed. If no abnormality notification flag is set, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to superimpose and display the magnetic abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time to the VDP 109 (step S1920). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays a magnetic abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the command (see FIG. 107 (E)).

  Furthermore, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the magnetic abnormality notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1921). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormality notification sound) corresponding to notification of magnetic abnormality is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a magnetic abnormality notification flag indicating that a magnetic abnormality is being notified (step S1922), and proceeds to step S1923.

  In step S1923, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag indicating that a vibration abnormality notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1929. If the vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag is set, the vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1924). Further, it is checked whether any abnormality notification flag (abnormal winning notification flag, start abnormal winning notification flag or magnetic abnormality notification flag) is set (step S1925). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1929. That is, when an abnormal winning notification or magnetic abnormality notification is already made to the big winning opening or the second start winning opening 14, control is performed so that the abnormal winning notification or magnetic abnormality notification is continuously executed with priority. . If no abnormality notification flag is set, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to superimpose the vibration abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time to the VDP 109 (step S1926). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays a vibration abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the command (see FIG. 107 (F)).

  Furthermore, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the vibration abnormality notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1927). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormality notification sound) corresponding to the notification of vibration abnormality is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a vibration abnormality notifying flag indicating that the vibration abnormality is being notified (step S1928), and proceeds to step S1929.

  In step S1929, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not an abnormal release notification designation command reception flag indicating that an abnormal release notification designation command has been received is set. If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If the abnormal release notification designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal release notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1930). Further, it is confirmed whether any abnormality notification flag (abnormal winning notification flag, start abnormal winning notification flag, magnetic abnormality notification flag, or vibration abnormality notification flag) is set (step S1931). If it is set, the process is terminated as it is. That is, when an abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality notification, or vibration abnormality notification is already made to the big winning opening or the second start winning opening 14, priority is given to the abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality notification, or vibration abnormality notification. Control to continue execution. If no abnormality notification flag is set, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to superimpose the abnormality release notification screen on the screen displayed at that time to the VDP 109 (step S1932). In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays the abnormal opening notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 107 (G)).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal release notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1933). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of an abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the abnormal release notification is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal opening notification in-progress flag indicating that abnormal opening is being notified (step S1934), and the processing is ended.

  110 to 112 are explanatory diagrams illustrating examples of display effects on the effect display device 9 and sound effects by the speaker 27. FIG. FIG. 110 (A) shows an example when the effect display device 9 is performing variable display of effect symbols. FIG. 110 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 111 (C) shows an example in which an abnormal winning notification is performed in the effect display device 9 and an abnormal notification sound is output by the speaker 27. When the production control microcomputer 100 receives the abnormal winning notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display an abnormal winning notification screen on the production display device 9, and outputs an abnormal notification sound from the speaker 27. Take control. Moreover, even if the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the abnormal winning notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormal notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is finished, the display of the abnormal winning notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued.

  FIG. 111 (D) shows an example in which a start abnormality winning notification is performed in the effect display device 9 and an abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27. When the production control microcomputer 100 receives a start abnormal prize notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display a start abnormality prize notification screen on the effect display device 9 and outputs an abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. Control to output. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the start abnormal winning notification screen display on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is finished, the display of the start abnormality winning notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued.

  FIG. 112 (E) shows an example in which a magnetic abnormality notification is performed in the effect display device 9 and an abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27. When the production control microcomputer 100 receives the magnetic abnormality notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the production control microcomputer 100 controls to display the magnetic abnormality notification screen on the production display device 9 and outputs an abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. Take control. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the magnetic abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is finished, the display of the magnetic abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued.

  FIG. 112 (F) shows an example in which a vibration abnormality notification is performed in the effect display device 9 and an abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27. When receiving the vibration abnormality notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 controls to display the vibration abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9, and causes the speaker 27 to output an abnormality notification sound. Take control. Further, even if the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the vibration abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is finished, the display of the vibration abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued.

  FIG. 112 (F) shows an example in which the abnormal display notification is performed in the effect display device 9 and the abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27. When receiving the abnormal release notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display the abnormal release notification screen on the production display device 9 and outputs an abnormal notification sound from the speaker 27. Take control. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the abnormal release notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Further, even if the variable display of the effect symbol is finished, the display of the abnormal opening notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued.

  The production control microcomputer 100 stops the control to delete the abnormality notification screen (abnormal winning notification screen, start abnormal winning notification screen, magnetic abnormality notification screen, vibration abnormality notification screen, abnormal release notification screen) and output of the abnormality notification sound. Since the control is not executed, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. However, the production control microcomputer 100 stops displaying the abnormality notification screen and outputting the abnormality notification sound when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound have started. You may control. In this embodiment, the abnormality notification is performed by the effect display device 9 and the speaker 27. However, the abnormality notification may be performed using a lamp / LED. In that case, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the abnormal winning notification designation command, the starting abnormal winning notification designation command, the magnetic abnormality notification designation command, the vibration abnormality notification designation command, or the abnormal release notification designation command, the lamp / LED is displayed. The control is performed so as to blink in a manner different from the manner in the normal state (when no abnormal winning has occurred). In addition, even when the abnormality notification is performed using the lamp / LED, the abnormality notification using the lamp / LED is continued even if the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. .

  In this embodiment, the gaming control microcomputer 560 is connected to the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening for a predetermined period (a period during which the initialization notification is executed) after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Without detecting abnormal winnings, magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, or abnormal releases, and from the gaming control microcomputer 560, abnormal winning notification specifying commands, starting abnormal winning notification specifying commands, magnetic abnormal notification specifying commands, vibration abnormal notification specifying commands No abnormal release notification designation command is transmitted. However, the game control microcomputer 560 always detects abnormal winnings, magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, and abnormal opening to the big winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the production controlling microcomputer 100 When an abnormal prize notification designation command, a start abnormal prize notification designation command, a magnetic abnormality notice designation command, a vibration abnormality notice designation command, or an abnormal release notice designation command is received within a predetermined period after power supply to the gaming machine is started In this case, the abnormality notification may not be performed. In other words, the game control microcomputer 560 does not win the initialization notification, whether it is a period during which the initialization notification is being executed, abnormal winning to the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, abnormal opening. Is detected, the abnormal start notification designation command, the abnormal start notification designation command, the magnetic abnormality notification designation command, the vibration abnormality notification designation command, and the abnormal release notification designation command are transmitted. During the period when the initialization notification is being executed, the abnormality notification processing is performed even if an abnormal winning notification designation command, a start abnormal winning notification designation command, a magnetic abnormality notification designation command, a vibration abnormality notification designation command, or an abnormal release notification designation command is received. The initialization notification may be given priority over the abnormality notification by continuing the initialization notification without performing . In that case, if an abnormal prize notification designation command, a start abnormal prize notification designation command, a magnetic abnormality notice designation command, a vibration abnormality notice designation command, or an abnormal release notice designation command is received during the period when the initialization notice is being executed, You may make it perform abnormality alerting | reporting when the period in which conversion alerting | reporting is performed is complete | finished.

  FIG. 113 is a timing chart showing a detection timing for detecting an abnormal winning to the big winning opening (or the second start winning opening 14) and a notification timing for executing an abnormal winning notification (or a start abnormal winning notification). .

  As shown in FIG. 113, the game control microcomputer 560 has a special prize winning device 20 (or a variable winning ball physically) when the grand prize winning opening (or the second start winning opening 14) is in an open state. In a state in which the device 15) is open and in a predetermined interval period (in this example, 1 second), a game ball is won (count switch) in the big winning opening (or the second starting winning opening 14) 23 is detected (or the second start port switch 14a is turned on), the processing is performed as a normal winning. When the big winning opening (or the second starting winning opening 14) is in a state other than the open state (see step S255 (in the case of the second starting winning opening 14, step S267)), the big winning opening (or second When it is detected that a game ball has been won (start switch 24a is turned on (or the second start switch 14a is turned on)) to the start winning opening 14) (step S258 (in the case of the second starting winning opening 14, step S270)), it is determined that there is an abnormal winning, and the value of the winning cumulative number counter (or the starting winning cumulative number counter) is counted up (see step S259 (in the case of the second starting winning port 14, step S271)). Then, in a state where the grand prize opening (or the second start prize opening 14) is in the state other than the open state, the game ball is won (or the count switch 23 is turned on (or the second switch prize opening 14)). When the number of times the second start port switch 14a is turned on) reaches a first predetermined value (in this example, once) (see step S263 (in the case of the second start winning port 14, step S275)). ), It is determined that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening (or the second starting winning opening 14) has occurred, and an abnormal signal is externally output via the information terminal board 34 (step S264 (in the case of the second starting winning opening 14). Step S276)).

  In addition, when the grand prize opening (or the second start prize opening 14) is in a state other than the open state, the game ball is awarded to the big prize opening (or the second start prize opening 14) (the count switch 23 is turned on (or When the number of times the second start port switch 14a is turned on) reaches a second predetermined value (5 times in this example) (see step S260 (in the case of the second start winning port 14, step S272)). ), It is determined to notify that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening (or the second starting winning opening 14) has occurred, and an abnormal winning notification specifying command (or a starting abnormal winning notification specifying command) is sent to the production control microcomputer. (See step S262 (in the case of the second start winning opening 14, step S274)).

  The production control microcomputer 100 starts the abnormal winning notification (or the starting abnormal winning notification) based on the reception of the abnormal winning notification specifying command (or the starting abnormal winning notification specifying command) (steps S1906 to S1910). (Refer to steps S1911 to S1916 for the second start winning opening 14).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, it is determined that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening or the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, or a predetermined abnormal state (the magnetic field around the big winning opening is determined). Based on the determination that an abnormality, an abnormal state of vibration of the gaming machine, or an abnormally open state of the special prize opening has occurred, an external device (this book) provided outside the gaming machine via the information terminal board 34 In the example, a predetermined abnormality signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to output information indicating that a plurality of anomalies have occurred, such as the occurrence of an abnormal win and the occurrence of a predetermined anomaly in the gaming machine to the external device. Further, according to this embodiment, the common output terminal (information terminal board) provided in the gaming machine is used when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred and when it is determined that a predetermined abnormal condition has occurred. A predetermined abnormality signal can be output from 34 common connectors CN9). For this reason, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of parts of a mechanism for outputting information to an external device and a complicated wiring operation.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the opening detection sensor 92 which outputs an opening detection signal when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in the opening state is provided. Further, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is not controlled to be in the open state, it is determined that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred in the gaming machine based on the fact that the open detection sensor 92 outputs the open detection signal. For this reason, it is possible to notify the fraudulent act in advance, to speed up the discovery of the fraudulent act, and to improve the effect of reporting the fraud. In addition, since the occurrence of fraud is reported before profits are provided to the fraudster, a deterrent effect against fraud is produced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred or when it is determined that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred, a predetermined abnormal signal is sent to the external device for a predetermined period (in this example, (30 seconds) Output is possible. Further, when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred or when it is determined that a predetermined abnormal condition has occurred while outputting a predetermined abnormal signal, it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred last. Or when it is determined that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred, a predetermined abnormal signal can be output to the external device for a predetermined period (in this example, 30 seconds). Therefore, the external device receiving the predetermined abnormality signal can recognize and notify that the abnormal winning state or the predetermined abnormal state has been prolonged.

  When the abnormal signal is externally output to the hall computer, which is an external device, the hall computer notifies the occurrence of the abnormality during the period of receiving the abnormal signal. For example, the hall computer may output an abnormality notification screen or abnormality notification sound for notifying abnormality, and count the number of receptions of the abnormality signal and display the counting result.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when a start winning to the first start winning port 13 occurs, the start port 1 signal is output to the external device via the information terminal board 34. Further, when a start winning to the second start winning port 14 occurs, the start port 1 signal is output to the external device via the information terminal board 34. When a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occur within a preset period, a start opening 1 signal based on one start winning is output. After a predetermined period of time elapses, a start port 1 signal based on the other start winning can be output. Therefore, even when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occur continuously within a preset period, the start opening based on each start winning prize One signal can be recognized by an external device.

  Specifically, when the interval between the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 13a and the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 14a is shorter than 0.200 seconds, The start port 1 signal is output after a predetermined period (0.200 second interval) from the end of the output of the start port 1 signal. Thereby, even if the start winnings are generated continuously within a predetermined period (0.200 seconds), the start computer 1 signal based on each starting win can be surely recognized in the hall computer. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to the effect control microcomputer 100 when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred or when it is determined that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred. On the other hand, a predetermined abnormality command (in this example, an abnormal prize notification designation command, a start abnormality prize notification designation command, a magnetic abnormality notice designation command, a vibration abnormality notice designation command, an abnormal release notice designation command) is transmitted. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to notify an abnormality indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred or an abnormal condition has occurred based on the received predetermined abnormal command (in this example, an abnormal winning notification, a start abnormal winning notification). , Magnetic abnormality notification, vibration abnormality notification, abnormal release notification). Therefore, the gaming machine side can also notify that an abnormal winning has occurred or that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred, and that an abnormal winning has occurred to a player or the like (including a store clerk in a gaming store) It is possible to recognize that an abnormal state has occurred.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the first abnormal command (in this example, an abnormal winning notification designation command, a start abnormal winning notification notification designation) is determined when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred. Command). In addition, when it is determined that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred, a second abnormal command different from the first abnormal command (in this example, a magnetic abnormality notification designation command, a vibration abnormality notification designation command, an abnormal release notification designation command) ). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 performs abnormality notification in different notification modes when the first abnormality command is received and when the second abnormality command is received. Therefore, by performing abnormality notification in different notification modes, it is possible to notify which abnormality between the abnormal winning and the predetermined abnormal state has occurred. Therefore, by recognizing which abnormality between the abnormal winning a prize and the predetermined abnormal state has occurred, it is possible to take an appropriate measure for canceling the abnormality.

  In this embodiment, a different production control command (abnormality) is detected for each type of detected abnormality (abnormal winning at the big winning opening, abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, abnormal opening). Although a case where a winning notification designation command, a start abnormal winning notification designation command, a magnetic abnormality notification designation command, a vibration abnormality notification designation command, an abnormal release notification designation command) is transmitted, an effect control command to be transmitted for some abnormalities is shown. You may make it share. For example, a common abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening is detected and when an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening is detected. Also good. In addition, for example, a common abnormal state notification command is detected when a magnetic abnormality around the big prize opening is detected, when an abnormal vibration state of the gaming machine is detected, and when an abnormal open state of the big prize opening is detected. You may make it transmit to the microcomputer 100 for production control.

  Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the abnormal winning, the magnetic abnormality, the vibration abnormality, and the abnormal opening to the big winning opening and the second starting winning opening 14, the door opening signal from the door opening switches 154 and 155 is also sent to the information terminal board. Although the case where the output to the external device via 34 and the door opening abnormality is not notified on the gaming machine side is shown, the type of abnormality that is externally output as an abnormal signal to the external device via the information terminal board 34 And the type of abnormality for which abnormality notification is performed on the gaming machine side may be made common. Further, for example, even when other abnormalities such as a full tank error and a payout error other than the door opening are detected, the information is output only to the external device via the information terminal board 34 (or notification is made only on the gaming machine side). In this manner, the type of abnormality that is externally output as an abnormal signal to the external device via the information terminal board 34 may be different from the type of abnormality that is notified on the gaming machine side.

  In this embodiment, when the door open state is detected by the door open switches 154 and 155 (abnormal opening of the glass door frame 2, the mechanism plate, or the game frame), only external output is performed to the external device. By not performing abnormality notification on the aircraft side, it is possible to prevent situations where cheating is promoted. For example, if the opening state of the door is notified on the gaming machine side, the player will recognize that the glass door frame 2 is open by notification when the glass door frame 2 is not closed by chance. Therefore, the player may recognize that the game ball can be directly won at the winning opening through the gap of the glass door frame 2, and there is a possibility that a situation in which cheating is promoted may occur. In this embodiment, since the gaming machine side is configured not to notify the door open state, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the door open state, and the situation that encourages cheating is changed. It is preventing.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the determination that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. An abnormal winning notification or a starting abnormal winning notification is executed. In addition, the count switch 23 and the second start port switch 14a generate a winning detection signal a plurality of times (in this example, the second winning ball signal device 20 and the variable starting ball device 15 are not controlled to be opened). Predetermined value (5)) An abnormal winning notification or a starting abnormal winning notification is executed on the condition that it has been output. Therefore, it is possible to notify that a prize abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act on the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and as a result, an illegal act on the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the variable winning ball apparatus 15 It can be surely prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern command that can specify the start of variable display of a special symbol and the variable display time. Also, a cumulative prize counter that stores the cumulative number of output of the winning detection signal by the count switch 23 and the second start port switch 14a when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are not controlled to be in the open state. And a start winning cumulative number counter. Then, based on the second predetermined value (5 in this example) for determining whether or not to execute the abnormal winning notification or the starting abnormal winning notification, and the cumulative number stored in the winning cumulative number counter or the starting winning cumulative number counter. Then, an abnormal winning notification designation command and a starting abnormal winning notification designation command for instructing execution of abnormal winning notification and starting abnormal winning notification are transmitted. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts variable display of the production symbols on the production display device 9 based on the received variation pattern command, and derives and displays the display result on the production display device 9 when the variable display time has elapsed. To do. In addition, an abnormal winning notification or a starting abnormal winning notification is executed based on the received abnormal winning notification specifying command or the starting abnormal winning notification specifying command, and an abnormality occurs when the effect display device 9 performs variable display of the effect symbol. It is configured such that a winning notification or a start abnormal winning notification can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to notify that a prize abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act on the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and as a result, an illegal act on the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the variable winning ball apparatus 15 It can be surely prevented. Further, by executing the abnormal winning notification and the starting abnormal winning notification on the production control microcomputer 100 side, the special variable winning ball device 20 and the variable winning ball device are not increased without increasing the processing load of the game control microcomputer 560. 15 can be notified of a prize abnormality due to an illegal act.

  In this embodiment, an abnormal signal is externally output based on the value of the winning cumulative number counter or the starting winning cumulative number counter having reached the first predetermined value (1 in this example), and the winning cumulative number counter or The case where the abnormal winning notification or the abnormal starting winning notification is performed based on the fact that the value of the start winning cumulative number counter becomes a second predetermined value (5 in this example) different from the first predetermined value is shown. Based on the fact that the number counter and the cumulative number of starting winning prizes have reached a predetermined value, an abnormal signal is output to the outside, and at the same time, an abnormal winning notification specifying command and a starting abnormal winning notification specifying command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, an abnormal winning notification or a starting abnormal winning notification may be performed.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the abnormality notification process. 114, the processes in steps S251 to S259 and the processes in steps S267 to S271 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. When the value of the cumulative prize counter is incremented by 1 (see step S259), the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the cumulative prize counter after the addition is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 in this example) (step S261A). . If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) to the abnormal signal information timer (step S262A) and sets an abnormal winning detection flag (step S265A). At 80, control for transmitting an abnormal winning notification designation command is performed (step S266A).

  Further, when the value of the start prize cumulative number counter is incremented by 1 (see step S271), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the start prize cumulative number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 in this example). (Step S273A). If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S274A) and sets a start abnormal winning detection flag (step S277A), and effects control. Control is performed to transmit a start abnormal prize notification designation command to the board 80 (step S278A).

  When the processing shown in FIG. 114 is executed, an abnormal signal is output to the outside at the same time that the cumulative prize counter and the starting prize cumulative number counter have reached a common predetermined value (5 in this example). A winning notification designation command or a start abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100, and an abnormal winning notification or a starting abnormal winning notification is executed. Therefore, according to the example shown in FIG. 114, a gaming machine is transmitted by transmitting a threshold value for determining whether or not to output an abnormal signal to the outside and an abnormal command (abnormal winning notification designation command, start abnormal winning notification designation command). Since the threshold for determining whether or not abnormality notification is performed on the side is a common threshold (see steps S261A and S273A), the control burden on the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, characteristic configurations of gaming machines as shown in the following (1) to (6) are also shown.

  (1) In the gaming machine, a player can play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and a payout condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins a winning opening) A game machine that pays out game media to a player based on a game control board (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that executes a game control process for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560). A main board 31), a payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out game media, and a payout control means (for example, a payout control microcomputer 370) for executing a payout control process for controlling the payout means. A mounted payout control board (for example, payout control board 37) and payout detection means (for example, payout number count switch 301) for detecting the payout of game media by the payout means. An information output board (for example, information terminal board 34) that is connected only to the game control board and outputs input information to an external device (for example, hall computer) provided outside the gaming machine. The game control means generates control information (e.g., start 1 signal, symbol determination number 1 signal, symbol determination number 2 signal, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, time reduction signal, jackpot 3 Game control information output means (for example, a part for executing steps S1001 to S1068, S1102, and S1103 in the game control microcomputer 560) that outputs a signal, a jackpot 4 signal) And the payout information (for example, a prize ball signal; Steps S1075 to S1103 are output to the information terminal board 34), and the input information is output to an external device (for example, information output processing (steps S1001 to S1103) by the game control microcomputer 560). The output signal may be input and output to the hall computer). According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the wiring work for the information output board.

  (2) A detection signal output when the payout detecting means detects the payout of the game medium is input to the payout control board and input from the payout control board to the game control board (for example, the payout number count switch 301) Is input to the payout control board 37, input from the payout control board 37 to the main board 31 as a prize ball count signal, or the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 is branched by the payout control board 37. , Input from the payout control board 37 to the main board 31). According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the wiring work for the information output board.

  (3) The gaming machine variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and effect symbols) that can identify each of them, and a variable display device that derives and displays a display result (for example, special symbol indicators 8a and 8b). And an effect display device 9), and when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device, the gaming machine is shifted to a specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player A special variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 20) that can be changed to an open state in a specific gaming state, and a winning area including the special variable winning device (for example, a big winning opening, a first start opening winning) 13, winning detection means (for example, a count switch 23, a first starting port switch, etc.) for detecting a game medium won in the second starting winning port 14, winning ports 29, 30, 33, 39 and outputting a detection signal. And a game control means based on the fact that a payout condition is established based on the winning of a game medium in the winning area. Thus, a payout number command transmitting means for transmitting a payout number command (for example, a payout command signal) designating the number of game media to be paid out (for example, the winning ball control process of step S342 in the game control microcomputer 560 is executed). Portion) and a winning determination means for determining whether or not the game medium has won the special variable winning device based on a detection signal from the winning detection means (for example, steps S331 to S338 and S351 in the game control microcomputer 560). The part that executes the processing of S356 and S361, especially the count switch input bit And the payout control means pays out the number of game media designated by the payout number command based on the reception of the payout number command. Including game medium payout control means for executing payout control (for example, a part for executing main control communication processing in step S755 and payout ball lending control processing in step S756 in the payout control microcomputer 370). Command transmission prohibiting means (for example, for game control) for prohibiting transmission of the payout number command by the payout number command transmitting means when it is determined that the winning determination means has won the special variable winning device in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state. A portion that executes step S362 in the microcomputer 560). May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent award ball payout based on fraud, and to output payout information suitable for actually performed payout control to an external device.

  (4) The gaming machine has a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and effect symbols) that can identify each based on the winning of the game medium in the first starting area (for example, the second starting winning port 14). ) And a variable display device (for example, special symbol displays 8a and 8b and effect display device 9) for displaying and displaying the display result, and a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived to the variable display device. A gaming machine that is shifted to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when displayed, and a closed state (for example, a closed state) in which no game medium is won in the first starting area. It can be changed to an open state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can be won in one start area, and the open state is based on the game medium winning in a second start area (for example, gate 32). Variable to be A prize device (for example, variable prize ball device 15) and a winning area including a first starting area (for example, a big winning opening, a first starting opening 13, a second starting winning opening 14, and winning openings 29, 30, 33) , 39) that detects a game medium won and outputs a detection signal (for example, count switch 23, first start port switch 13a, second start port switch 14a, winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a), and the game control means specifies a payout number command (for example, payout) for designating the number of game media to be paid out based on the fact that a payout condition based on winning of the game media in the winning area is established. A payout number command transmission means (for example, a part for executing the prize ball control process in step S342 in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting a command signal); Winning determination means for determining whether or not the game medium has won the first starting area based on the detection signal from the winning detection means (for example, steps S331 to S338, S351 to S356, S361 in the game control microcomputer 560). In particular, the payout control means is based on the receipt of the payout number command, and the payout control means is based on the receipt of the payout number command. , Game medium payout control means for executing payout control for paying out the number of game media designated by the payout quantity command (for example, main control communication processing in step S755 in the payout control microcomputer 370 and winning ball in step S756) The game control means is a closed state of the variable winning device. If the winning determination means determines that the first start area has been won, the command transmission prohibiting means for prohibiting transmission of the payout number command by the payout number command transmitting means (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 560) A portion including S363) may be included. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent award ball payout based on fraud, and to output payout information suitable for actually performed payout control to an external device.

  (5) The gaming machine has a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and production symbols) that can be identified based on the winning of the game medium in the first starting area (for example, the second starting winning port 14). ) And a variable display device (for example, special symbol displays 8a and 8b and effect display device 9) for displaying and displaying the display result, and a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived to the variable display device. A gaming machine that is shifted to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when displayed, and a closed state (for example, a closed state) in which no game medium is won in the first starting area. It can be changed to an open state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can be won in one start area, and the open state is based on the game medium winning in a second start area (for example, gate 32). Variable to be A prize device (for example, variable prize ball device 15) and a winning area including a first starting area (for example, a big winning opening, a first starting opening 13, a second starting winning opening 14, and winning openings 29, 30, 33) , 39) that detects a game medium won and outputs a detection signal (for example, count switch 23, first start port switch 13a, second start port switch 14a, winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a), and the game control means determines whether or not the game medium has won the first start area based on the detection signal from the winning detection means (for example, a game control microcomputer). 560), the game control information output means controls when the game medium wins in the first start area. As the information, start information (for example, start port 1 signal) indicating the winning of the game medium to the first start area is output (for example, steps S1001 to S1030, S1102, and S1103 are executed), and the identification information is variably displayed. When the display result is derived and displayed, identification information confirmation information (for example, symbol determination frequency 1 signal, symbol determination frequency 2 signal) indicating that the display result of the variable display of identification information is derived and displayed as control information is output. (For example, steps S1031 to S1042, S1102, and S1103 are executed). When the game control means determines that the winning determination means has won the first starting area in the closed state of the variable winning device, variable display is performed. Variable display prohibiting means for prohibiting start of variable display of identification information in device (for example, step in game control microcomputer 560) The game control information output means prohibits the output of the identification information confirmation information when the variable display prohibiting means prohibits the start of variable display of the identification information (for example, the game). In the control microcomputer 560, the starting port 1 signal is output to the information terminal board 34 based on the winning (abnormal winning) at the second starting winning port 14, but the variable display of the identification information is not started. 1 signal and 2 signals of symbol determination number are not output). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent transition to a specific gaming state due to fraud, and to output identification information confirmation information suitable for variable display control actually performed to an external device. be able to.

  (6) The game control means counts the number of payouts of game media specified based on the detection signal output when the payout detection means detects the payout of game media, and provides payout information every time a predetermined number is counted. The payout information output means (for example, the part which performs step S1075-S1103 in the game control microcomputer 560) output to an information output board | substrate may be comprised. According to such a configuration, it is possible to unify processing related to information output to an external device.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the abnormal start winning notification to the second start winning opening 14 or the big winning opening is executed. You may make it determine the alert | report of abnormal winning. Hereinafter, a second embodiment in which notification of abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 or the big winning opening is determined on the side of the production control microcomputer 100 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  First, the operation of the game control means (game control microcomputer 560) will be described. FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 80 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 115, in this embodiment, instead of the abnormal prize notification designation command and the start abnormal prize notification designation command shown in the first embodiment, an abnormal prize detection designation command and a start abnormality are provided as performance control commands. A winning detection designation command is used. The other effect control commands are the same as the effect control commands shown in the first embodiment.

  Command D006 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning detection designation command) for designating that an abnormal winning of a game ball to the big winning opening has been detected. The command D007 (H) is an effect control command (starting abnormal winning detection) that designates that an abnormal winning of a game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected when the second starting winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state. Specified command).

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the abnormality notifying process in step S23 in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S251 to S258 and the processes in steps S267 to S270 are the same as those described in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, when the result of the logical product is not 0 (see N in step S258), the CPU 56 does not check the cumulative number of winning prizes, and directly checks the abnormal signal information timer for a predetermined time (this example). Is set to 30 seconds) (step S262B). Then, an abnormal winning detection flag is set (step S265B), and control for transmitting an abnormal winning detection designation command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S266B).

  On the other hand, when the logical product operation result is not 0 (see N in step S270), the CPU 56 does not check the cumulative number of winning prizes and keeps the abnormal signal information timer for a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds). Is set (step S274B). Then, a start abnormal winning detection flag is set (step S277B), and control is performed to transmit a start abnormal winning detection designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S278B).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means (the effect control microcomputer 100) will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing (step S704) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S611 to S642 and the processes in steps S647 to S661 in the command analysis process are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal prize detection designation command (D006 (H)) (step S643A), the effect control CPU 101 uses an abnormal prize accumulation number counter for counting the number of receptions of the abnormal prize detection designation command. The value is incremented by 1 (step S643B), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the abnormal winning cumulative number counter after the addition is a predetermined value (5 in this example) or more (step S643C). When the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the effect control CPU 101 determines to notify the occurrence of the abnormal winning in the special winning opening, and determines to perform the abnormal winning notification. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets an abnormal winning notification determination flag (step S643D). The abnormal winning notification determination flag is a flag indicating that it is determined to perform abnormal winning notification based on the occurrence of an abnormal winning at the big winning opening.

  If the received production control command is a start abnormal prize detection designation command (D007 (H)) (step S645A), the production control CPU 101 accumulates the start abnormal prize accumulation for counting the number of receptions of the start abnormal prize detection designation command. The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S645B), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the starting abnormal winning cumulative number counter after the addition is a predetermined value (5 in this example) or more (step S645C). If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the effect control CPU 101 determines to notify the occurrence of the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14, and determines to perform the starting abnormal winning notification. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a start abnormal winning notification determination flag (step S645D). The abnormal start winning notification determination flag is a flag indicating that it is determined to perform the abnormal start winning notification based on the occurrence of an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14.

  FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S851 to S855 and the processes in steps S856 and S857 are the same as those described in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, if it is determined that the big win or the small win is made (see Y in step S855), the production control CPU 101 clears the abnormal winning cumulative number counter (step S855A) and starts. The abnormal winning cumulative number counter is cleared (step S855B), and the process proceeds to step S856.

  The start abnormal winning cumulative number counter may be cleared based on the fact that the display result of the variable symbol display is determined to be winning. For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines Y in step S4143 of the normal symbol stop process, it can specify that the normal symbol variation display result is a win. The command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the production control CPU 101) receives the production control command that can specify that the variation display result of the normal symbol is a win, and receives an abnormal start winning prize. The cumulative number counter may be cleared.

  In this embodiment, when the main process is started after the power to the gaming machine is turned on, the abnormal winning cumulative number counter and the starting abnormal winning cumulative are also included in the initialization process of the main process (see step S701). The number counter is cleared.

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart illustrating notification control processing according to the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S1901 to S1905, the processes in steps S1908 to S1910, and the processes in steps S1913 to S1934 are the same as those described in the first embodiment. In step S1906A, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the abnormal winning notification determination flag is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1911A. If it has been set, the abnormal winning notification determination flag is reset (step S1907A), and processing for starting abnormal winning notification after step S1908 is executed.

  In step S1911A, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the start abnormal winning notification determination flag is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1917. If it has been set, the start abnormal winning notification determination flag is reset (step S1912A), and processing for starting the start abnormal winning notification after step S1913 is executed.

  FIG. 120 shows a detection timing for detecting an abnormal winning to the big winning opening (or the second starting winning opening 14) in the second embodiment, and a notification for executing an abnormal winning notification (or a starting abnormal winning notification). It is a timing diagram which shows a timing.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the game control microcomputer 560 has a special prize winning device 20 (or a variable prize ball physically) when the grand prize winning opening (or the second start winning opening 14) is in an open state. In a state in which the device 15) is open and in a predetermined interval period (in this example, 1 second), a game ball is won (count switch) in the big winning opening (or the second starting winning opening 14) 23 is detected (or the second start port switch 14a is turned on), the processing is performed as a normal winning. When the big winning opening (or the second starting winning opening 14) is in a state other than the open state (see step S255 (in the case of the second starting winning opening 14, step S267)), the big winning opening (or second When it is detected that a game ball has been won (start switch 24a is turned on (or the second start switch 14a is turned on)) to the start winning opening 14) (step S258 (in the case of the second starting winning opening 14, step S270)), an abnormal winning is determined, and an abnormal signal is externally output via the information terminal board 34 (see step S262B (in the case of the second start winning opening 14, step S274B)). Also, an abnormal winning detection designation command (or a start abnormal winning detection designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S266B and S278B).

  When receiving the abnormal prize detection designation command (or the start abnormal prize detection designation command), the production control microcomputer 100 counts up the value of the abnormal prize cumulative number counter (or the starting abnormal prize cumulative number counter) (step). (Refer to S643B and S645B). When the number of times of receiving the abnormal winning detection designation command (or the start abnormal winning detection designation command) is accumulated and reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 5 times) (see steps S643C and S645C), Then, it is determined to notify that the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14) has occurred, and the abnormal winning notification (or start abnormal winning notification) is started (steps S1906A to S1910 (in the case of the second starting winning opening 14). Steps S1911A to S1916).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern command that can specify the start of variable display of a special symbol and the variable display time. Further, when the special variable winning ball device 20 or the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to be in the open state, the abnormal winning or starting is performed based on the fact that the count switch 23 or the second start port switch 14a outputs the winning detection signal. An abnormal winning detection designation command or a start abnormal winning detection designation command indicating that an abnormal winning has been detected is transmitted. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the special variable winning ball device 20 and the variable winning ball device 15 are not controlled to be in an open state based on the received abnormal winning detection designation command or the start abnormal winning detection detection designation command. An abnormal winning cumulative number counter and a starting abnormal winning cumulative number counter for storing the cumulative number of output of the winning detection signal by the count switch 23 and the second start port switch 14a are provided. In addition, the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbols based on the received variation pattern command, and the display result is derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 when the variable display time has elapsed. Further, based on a predetermined abnormality notification reference value (5 in this example) for determining whether or not to perform abnormality notification, and the cumulative number stored in the abnormal winning cumulative number counter or the starting abnormal winning cumulative number counter, Abnormal winning notification and start abnormal winning notification are executed. And it is comprised so that an abnormal winning alert | report and a start abnormal winning alert | report can be performed even when the effect display apparatus 9 is performing variable display of an effect symbol. Therefore, it is possible to notify that a prize abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act on the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and as a result, an illegal act on the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the variable winning ball apparatus 15 It can be surely prevented. Further, it is possible to detect a prize abnormality due to an illegal act on the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the variable winning ball apparatus 15 without increasing the processing load of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that one abnormal winning to the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14 is detected on the game control microcomputer 560 side by executing the above processing. It is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, and an abnormal signal is externally output to the external device via the information terminal board 34. Further, the abnormal winning notification or the starting abnormal winning notification is executed based on the fact that a predetermined number (5 in this example) of the abnormal winning detection specifying command and the starting abnormal winning detection specifying command are received on the production control microcomputer 100 side. .

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, a description has been given of a gaming machine (a so-called first type gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on a variable display result of a special symbol, a decorative symbol, and an effect symbol. However, a gaming machine that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on the winning of a game ball (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a variable winning ball apparatus (so-called role) provided in the gaming area ( In a so-called second type gaming machine) or a gaming machine that combines the first type and the second type, an abnormal signal may be output to an external device or notified of an abnormality. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in which an abnormality signal is externally output to an external device or notified of abnormality in a gaming machine combining the first type and the second type will be described.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, a case where a configuration in which external output or abnormality notification is applied to a gaming machine combining the first type and the second type will be described, but a special symbol, a decorative symbol, and an effect symbol are variably displayed. The same applies to a case where an external output or abnormality notification is applied to the second type gaming machine except that the above process is not executed.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 121 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment as seen from the front. As shown in FIG. 120, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. The lower part of the hitting ball supply tray 3 has a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and the speed at which the hitting ball launching device launches the game balls (that is, the strength of the spring that plays the game balls). And a hitting ball operating handle (operating knob) 5 for adjusting the height).

  The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball striking device by rotating the operation knob 5. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 5 to the right, the speed of the game ball fired from the ball striking device gradually increases, and when the speed exceeds a predetermined speed, the game ball fired Enters the left area of the gaming area 7 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 5 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 7 from above. Therefore, by changing the rotation amount with the operation knob 5 rotated to the right, it is possible to adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the hit ball launching device, and to adjust the area into which the game ball is to be shot. .

  A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 partitioned by guide rails is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  A variable winning ball apparatus 20 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 7. Below the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a first winning prize opening 11, a second starting prize opening 12, and a variable winning ball apparatus 15 forming a third starting prize opening 13 are provided. The winning ball that has entered the first starting winning port 11 is detected by the first starting port switch 11a, and the winning ball that has entered the second starting winning port 12 is detected by the second starting port switch 12a. Guided to the back. In addition, the winning ball that has entered the third starting winning opening 13 that can be won when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is detected by the third starting opening switch 13 a and guided to the back of the game board 6. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 15a. Hereinafter, the first start winning port 11, the second start winning port 12, and the third starting winning port 13 may be collectively referred to as “start winning ports” or may be expressed as starting winning ports 11, 12, and 13. . Further, the first start port switch 11a, the second start port switch 12a, and the third start port switch 13a may be collectively referred to as “start port switches” or may be represented as start port switches 11a, 12a, and 13a. .

  When the display result of the special symbol variation display is a small hit, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By the opening / closing control, the left open door 76A moves to the left from the initial position, and the right open door 76B moves to the right from the initial position, so that the variable winning ball device 20 enters the open state, and the open door 76A. , 76B return to the initial position, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed. The state where the variable winning ball apparatus 20 performs the opening operation in response to the detection of the winning of the start port switch in this way is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be referred to as an accessory. In addition, the game board 6 is provided with various kinds of winnings. Hereinafter, the winning combination means the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  An effect display device 9 such as an LCD for effect display is provided on the back side inside the variable winning ball device 20. The effect display device 9 variably displays (variable display) the decorative symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the effect display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

  On the right side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a special symbol display 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided. The special symbol display 8 is constituted by, for example, a 7-segment display.

  Above the special symbol display 8, there is provided a special symbol start memory display 18 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls in which a game ball has entered the starting winning opening, that is, the starting memory number. The special symbol start memory display 18 displays up to four start memory numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol start memory display 18 increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is an effective start winning in the start winning openings 11, 12, and 13. Each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8, the number of LEDs that are lit is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol start memory display 18 shifts the lighting state every time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8. As will be described later, since the start memory number is also displayed on the effect display device 9, the special symbol start memory display 18 may not be provided.

  On the left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. When a game ball passes through the gate 32 provided in the game area 7 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 displays a variable symbol of a normal symbol (in this example, a numeric display with a 7-segment LED). Be started. In this embodiment, “7” is stopped and displayed at the end of variable display in the case of winning, and other than “7” is stopped and displayed in the case of losing. In the case of winning, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. Note that the normal symbol hit probability is 12/13, for example. Above the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of balls passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the gate 32 passes, the normal symbol start memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  In the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a big winning opening is provided in which the open / close plate 16 is opened by the solenoid 21 in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The opening / closing plate 16 is means for opening and closing the special winning opening. The winning ball entering the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23. A special winning area (V winning area) is formed inside the big winning opening, and a game ball that has passed the V winning area is detected by the V winning switch 22. The next round in the jackpot gaming state is started on the condition that the game ball passes the V winning area (except for the case of the final round).

  In addition, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 38 is provided on the right side of the opening / closing plate 16, and a winning opening (normal winning opening) 39 is provided on the left side of the opening / closing plate 16. The game balls that have won the game ball winning openings 38 and 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 38a and 39a. The winning openings 38 and 39 constitute a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game media and allowing winning. The start winning opening also constitutes a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning, and a winning area is also provided inside the large winning opening. When a game ball wins a winning area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player as a prize (prize ball).

  Decorative lamps blinking and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7, and there is an out port 26 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize at the bottom.

  Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the like) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  In this example, a prize ball LED 51 that is lit during award ball payout is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. It has been. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through the ball striking rail, and then falls in the game area 7. When the hit ball enters the start winning opening and is detected by the start port switch, if the variable display of the symbol can be started, the special symbol starts variable display on the special symbol display 8 and the decoration display 9 displays the decorative symbol. Starts variable display. If it is not in a state in which the variable display of the symbol can be started, if the number of start winning memories which is the reserved storage of the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 8 is not the upper limit number, the starting winning memory number is increased by one. That is, the number of LEDs to be turned on in the special symbol start memory display 18 is increased by one.

  The variable display of special symbols (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 8 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a big hit symbol (specific display result: specifically, for example, “3”, “7”), the first big hit gaming state (without starting operation state) of the big hit gaming state The game goes to the jackpot game state to be started. In the case of a symbol other than that (small hit symbol), it shifts to the starting operation state. In the start operation state, when a game ball wins in a special area provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20, the state shifts to a second big hit game state (a big hit game state started after passing through the start operation state).

  FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 according to the third embodiment. In this embodiment, instead of the abnormal winning notification designation command used in the first embodiment, an upper abnormal winning notification designation command and a lower abnormal winning notification designation command are used. Further, the meaning of the magnetic abnormality notification designation command is different from that of the first embodiment. Further, instead of the abnormal release designation command used in the first embodiment, an upper abnormal release notification designation command and a lower abnormal release notification designation command are used. Further, in place of the vibration abnormality notification designation command used in the first embodiment, a normal vibration abnormality notification designation command and a winning vibration abnormality notification designation command are used. In addition to the effect control command shown in the first embodiment, an accessory inspection display designation command, an accessory inspection display release designation command, an accessory prize designation command, and a V prize designation command are used.

  The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (upper abnormal winning notification designation command) for instructing that an abnormal winning to the variable winning ball apparatus (right) 20 has occurred. Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (lower abnormal winning notification designating command) for instructing that an abnormal winning at the big winning opening has occurred.

  Further, in this embodiment, a magnetic sensor is provided in the variable winning ball apparatus (accessory) 20 instead of providing a magnetic sensor in the special winning opening so that abnormal magnetism in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 can be detected. It is configured. In this embodiment, the command D003 (H) is an effect control command (magnetic abnormality notification designation command) instructing to notify that abnormal magnetism has been detected in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device (object) 20. .

  In this embodiment, a case where an abnormal signal is output to the outside and a magnetic abnormality notification is given based on the detection of a magnetic abnormality in the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20 is shown. (Accessory) In addition to the magnetic abnormality in 20, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, based on the detection of the magnetic abnormality in the special winning opening, an abnormality signal is output to the outside and a magnetic abnormality notification is performed. It may be.

  In this embodiment, an opening detection sensor is arranged in the special winning opening, and an opening detection sensor is also arranged in the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20. The command D005 (H) is an effect control command (upper abnormal opening notification designation command) for instructing notification that the variable winning ball apparatus (guard) 20 has been detected to be abnormally opened. Command D006 (H) is an effect control command (lower abnormal opening notification designation command) for instructing notification that abnormal opening of the special winning opening has been detected.

  The command D008 (H) is an effect control command (a bonus check display designation command) for instructing a check display for prompting a check for whether or not a game ball is clogged in the variable winning ball device (a bonus) 20. The command D009 (H) is an effect control command (an accessory inspection display release designation command) for instructing to cancel the inspection display in the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20.

  The command D00A (H) is an effect control command (normal vibration abnormality during normal operation) instructing that the abnormal winning is detected in the gaming machine when there is no gaming ball in the variable winning ball device (object) 20 Notification designation command). The command D00B (H) is an effect control command (indication of abnormal vibration at the time of winning) instructing to notify that abnormal vibration has been detected in the gaming machine when there is a gaming ball in the variable winning ball device (object) 20 Notification designation command).

  The command E401 (H) is an effect control command (commodity winning designation command) indicating that a winning for the variable winning ball apparatus (combination) 20 has occurred. The command E402 (H) is an effect control command (V winning designation command) indicating that a winning has been made to a specific winning opening (V winning opening) provided in the variable winning ball apparatus (right) 20.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program according to the third embodiment. In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8, the special winning opening and the accessory 20 is executed.

  When the CPU 56 performs the special symbol process, the start port switch (first start port switch 11a, second start port) for detecting that a game ball has won a start winning port provided in the game board 6 is provided. If the switch 12a or the third start opening switch 13a) is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening has occurred (step S321), the start opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). . Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of special symbols can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301).

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302).

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is specially set. It is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to the symbol stop process (step S303).

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. The variable display on the special symbol display 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. If the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S307). When the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to the pre-release of the accessory (step S304). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Pre-opening process of accessory (step S304): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 560 executes a process for performing the starting operation, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) in accordance with the process of releasing the accessory (step S305). Update to the value (5 in this example).

  Processing during opening of an accessory (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. It is confirmed whether or not the specific area switch 66a is turned on, and whether or not the accessory release time has elapsed. When the specific area switch 66a is turned on, the V winning flag is set. When the bonus release time has elapsed, the bonus is closed. Then, the value of the accessory release count counter is decremented by 1. If the value of the accessory release count counter is not 0, the accessory is released to perform the starting operation again. If the value of the accessory release count counter is 0, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to the post-function closing process (step S306).

  Post-combination processing (step S306): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. If the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S307). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (in this example, 0) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to open the big prize opening (large prize opening by the opening and closing plate 16). More specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the big prize opening is opened. In addition, the execution time of the process for opening the special prize opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is set to a value (this value corresponding to the process for opening the special prize opening (step S308)). In the example, update to 8). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is set to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to the post winning prize closing process (step S309). ).

  Process after closing the big prize opening (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm that all game balls have been discharged from the big prize opening is performed. When all the game balls are discharged and there are still remaining rounds and the continuation condition of the big hit game (the V winning) has been established, the internal state (specifically, the special symbol process flag) ) Is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening pre-opening process (step S307). When all rounds are completed or when the continuation condition for the big hit game is not satisfied, the internal state is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to the big hit end process (step S310).

  Big hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  In addition, when applying the configuration for external output or abnormality notification to the second type gaming machine, the special symbol variable display is not performed, so that only the processes of steps S304 to S310 are executed in the special symbol process. What is necessary is just to comprise.

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the accessory release pre-processing (step S304). In the case of opening the variable winning ball device (object) 20 once or twice in the small hit gaming state, the CPU 56 releases the variable winning ball device 20 (object) in the starting operation in the pre-opening process. 1 or 2 is set in the accessory release count counter indicating the number of times (step S411), and a value corresponding to the release time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is set in the accessory release time timer indicating the release time of the accessory (for example, 0.9 seconds). Step S412). Note that the value set in the accessory release count counter is a value corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol determined in the special symbol normal process. And the accessory 20 is made into an open state (step S413). Specifically, the opening / closing motor that drives the door of the accessory 20 is started to open the accessory (variable winning ball apparatus) 20. Also, the in-function game ball number counter that counts the game balls that have entered the game 20 is cleared (initialized to 0) (step S414), and the variable winning ball device (game) 20 is being opened. A character releasing flag indicating this is set (step S415). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during releasing the accessory (step S305) (step S416).

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the process during opening of an accessory (step S305). In the process during opening of the accessory, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the accessory release time timer has timed out (step S420). If it has timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory release number counter is 0 (whether or not the last release in the starting operation state has already ended) (step S420A). If the value of the bonus release counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S434. If the value of the accessory release number counter is not 0, the value of the accessory release number counter is decremented by 1 (step S420B). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory release number counter has become 0 (step S420C). When the value of the accessory release number counter becomes 0, that is, when the start operation end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S434. When the value of the accessory release number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 performs control for releasing the accessory again. That is, a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is set in the accessory opening time timer (step S420D). Further, the accessory 20 is controlled to be in an open state (step S420E). Then, an accessory release flag is set (step S420F).

  In step S434, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the in-function game ball number counter is zero. If the value of the in-game game ball number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S424. When the value of the game ball number counter in the bonus becomes 0, a timer after closing the bonus for measuring the elapsed time after closing the variable winning ball device (guard) 20 described later is reset (step S434A). ). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-process closing process (step S306) (step S435).

  As described above, the CPU 56 determines that when the value of the in-game game ball number counter becomes 0 after the bonus release time (0.9 seconds) for the final release has elapsed, that is, for all games. When the ball is ejected from the accessory 20, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing after closing the accessory (steps SS 420, S 420 A, S 420 C, S 434, S 435). In other words, in the process of releasing an accessory, the game state (in this case, the value of the special symbol process flag) is changed on condition that all the game balls are discharged from the accessory 20. It should be noted that the special symbol process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process on condition that no V winning has occurred in the post-combination processing (see steps S454 and S462 in FIG. 126).

  If the accessory release time timer has not timed out, the value of the accessory release time timer is decremented by 1 (step S421). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the accessory release time timer has timed out (step S422). If time-out has occurred, the accessory 20 is controlled to be closed (step S432). Specifically, the opening / closing motor is rotated in a direction to close the opening / closing door of the accessory 20. The bonus release flag is reset (step S432A), and a predetermined time (for example, 41.5 seconds) is set in the timer after closing the bonus (step S432B). In addition, the rotating body in the accessory 20 is stopped at the initial position, and the movable portion of the movable member in the accessory 20 is stopped at the initial position (position that does not block the game ball) (step S433).

  If the accessory release time timer has not timed out, the rotating body / movable part control is executed (step S423). Further, when the prize winning switch for detecting the winning of the game ball to the prize 20 is turned on, that is, when the gaming ball winning the prize is detected (step S424), the value of the in-function gaming ball number counter is incremented by one. At the same time (step S425), control for transmitting a prize winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S426). Further, when the accessory discharge switch for detecting that the game ball is discharged from the accessory 20 is turned on, that is, when the game ball discharged from the accessory is detected (step S427), the value of the in-function game ball number counter Is decremented by 1 (step S428).

  When the specific area switch indicating that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening is turned on (step S429), the V winning flag is set (step S430), and the V winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. Is performed (step S431).

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the post-completion processing (step S306). In the post-completion processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step S454). If the V winning flag is set, the V winning flag is reset (step S455), and the number of times of opening (the number of rounds) that is the number of times that the big winning opening can be opened in the second big hit game is set in the opening number counter ( Step S456). Note that the number of rounds set in the number-of-releases counter is the number of rounds corresponding to the stop symbol of the special symbol determined in the special symbol normal process.

  Furthermore, a value corresponding to the time before the start of the round (time for notifying in the effect display device 9 that the new round is started, for example) is set in the timer before the round start (step S457). Also, a big hit flag is set (step S458).

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S459), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S307). (Step S460).

  If it is confirmed in step S454 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hitting end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S461), and the special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S462).

  127 to 130 are flowcharts showing the abnormality notification processing in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, steps S251 to 254 are the same as those processes shown in the first embodiment. In step S255C, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 7 or more. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 7 or more (Y in step S255C), the game is in a big hit game. In such a state, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the big winning opening, so the process proceeds to the process of step S255D without performing the abnormal winning confirmation process to the big winning opening.

  A state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 7 is a state where no big hit game is played. In this state, if there is a game ball winning at the big winning opening, there is a possibility that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, an abnormal winning confirmation process for the special winning opening shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 7 (N in step S255C), the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S256C). Then, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the content of the loaded switch-on buffer and the count switch input bit determination value (step S257C). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 01 (H), that is, when the count switch 23 is on, the logical product operation result is 01 (H). When the count switch 23 is not turned on, the operation result of the logical product is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S258C), it is a case where a game ball has won a big winning opening regardless of being in the big hit gaming state. In this case, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the bottom winning cumulative number counter for counting the number of abnormal winnings to the big winning opening (step S259C). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the lower prize cumulative number counter is equal to or greater than a second predetermined value (5 in this example) (step S260C). If the value of the lower prize cumulative number counter is not greater than or equal to the second predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S263C. If the value of the lower prize accumulation counter is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines to notify that an abnormal prize has entered the big prize opening, and sets a lower abnormal prize detection flag (step S261C), a control for transmitting a lower abnormal prize notification designation command to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S262C).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the cumulative total number of winning prizes after addition is equal to or greater than a first predetermined value (1 in this example) (step S263C). If it is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning at the special winning opening has occurred, and sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) to the abnormal signal information timer (step S264C).

  When the first predetermined value is 1, when it is determined as N in step S260C, or when the process of step S262C is executed, the process of step S264C is directly performed without performing the determination process of step S263C. And a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) may be set in the abnormal signal information timer.

  In step S255D, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more and less than 7 (steps S255D and S255E). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more and less than 7 (Y in steps S255D and S255E), the game is in a small hit game. In such a state, there is a possibility that a game ball may win the variable winning ball device (combination) 20, so the process proceeds to the process of step S <b> 267 without performing the abnormal winning confirmation process for the winning combination 20. To do.

  The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is not less than 4 and less than 7 is a state other than the small hit game. If there is a winning game ball in the accessory 20 in such a state, the winning may be an abnormal winning. Therefore, the confirmation process of the abnormal winning to the accessory 20 shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the special symbol process flag is not less than 4 and less than 7 (N in step S255D or N in S255E), CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S256D). Then, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the winning combination winning detection switch input bit determination value (step S257D). When the winning combination winning detection switch is on, the logical product operation result is a value other than 00 (H). When the prize winning detection switch is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 0 (00 (H)).

  When the operation result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S258D), it is a case where a game ball wins the accessory 20 in spite of other than the small hit game state. In this case, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the top winning cumulative number counter for counting the number of abnormal winnings to the accessory 20 (step S259D). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the top winning cumulative number counter is equal to or greater than a second predetermined value (5 in this example) (step S260D). If the value of the top winning cumulative number counter is not equal to or greater than the second predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S263D. If the value of the top winning cumulative number counter is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning to the accessory 20 has occurred and sets an upper abnormal winning detection flag (step S261D), control is performed to transmit an upper abnormal winning notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S262D).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the top prize cumulative number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than a first predetermined value (1 in this example) (step S263D). If it is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal prize has been awarded to the accessory 20 and sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) to the abnormal signal information timer (step S264D).

  When the first predetermined value is 1, when it is determined as N in step S260D, or when the process of step S262D is executed, the process of step S264D is performed without performing the determination process of step S263D. And a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) may be set in the abnormal signal information timer.

  In this embodiment, the processes in steps S267 to S282 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the occurrence of abnormal winning in the third start winning opening 13 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 is detected by the processing of steps S267 to S276. In addition, the occurrence of magnetic anomalies around the accessory 20 is detected by the processes in steps S279 to S281.

  If the vibration detection signal is on in step S282, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the in-function game ball counter is 0 (step S282A). If the value of the game ball number counter in the accessory is 0, it is determined that a vibration abnormality state of the gaming machine has been detected when there is no game ball in the accessory 20, and the effect control board 80 is notified of the normal vibration abnormality. Control to transmit the designated command is performed (step S283A). If the value of the in-game game ball number counter is not 0, it is determined that an abnormal vibration state of the gaming machine has been detected in a state in which there is a game ball in the accessory 20, and the effect control board 80 is notified of the abnormal vibration during winning. Control to transmit the specified command is performed (step S283B). Then, according to the same processing as in the first embodiment, a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) is set in the abnormal signal information timer (step S284).

  By executing the processing of steps S282 to S284, an abnormality can be detected when an action that vibrates the gaming machine and illegally wins the game ball is performed, and the occurrence of the abnormality can be notified. The information can be output externally via the information terminal board 34. Further, in this embodiment, when a vibration abnormality state of the gaming machine is detected, a vibration abnormality notification designation command that differs depending on whether the game ball is present or not in the accessory 20 is transmitted.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the special winning opening open flag is set (step S285A). The big winning opening open flag is set (Y in step S285A) when the big winning opening is controlled to be in the open state. In such a state, when the big winning opening signal is not in the on state (N in Step S289A), there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the big winning opening. Specifically, it is considered that there is an abnormality in which the big prize opening is not opened even though the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to open the big prize opening. Therefore, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a lower abnormal release notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S290A). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S291A).

  Further, when the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S285A), the special winning opening is controlled to be closed. In such a state, when the big prize opening signal is on (Y in step S286A), there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the big prize opening. Specifically, it is considered that there is an abnormality in which the big prize opening is not closed even though the game control microcomputer 560 performs control for closing the big prize opening. Therefore, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a lower abnormal release notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S287A). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S288A).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the accessory release flag is set (step S285B). When the bonus release flag is set (Y in step S285B), the bonus 20 is being controlled to the open state. In such a state, if the accessory opening signal from the opening detection sensor arranged on the accessory 20 is not in the on state (N in Step S289B), there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the accessory 20. . More specifically, there is an abnormality in which the opening door of the accessory 20 is not opened even though the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to open the opening of the accessory 20. it is conceivable that. Therefore, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an upper abnormal release notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S290B). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S291B).

  In addition, when the accessory opening flag is not set (N in Step S285B), the accessory 20 is controlled to be in the closed state. In such a state, when the accessory opening signal is on (Y in step S286B), there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the accessory 20. Specifically, despite the fact that the gaming control microcomputer 560 controls the opening door of the accessory 20 to be closed, an abnormality has occurred in which the opening door of the accessory 20 is not closed. it is conceivable that. Therefore, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an upper abnormal release notification designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S287B). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S288B).

  As described above, by performing the processing of steps S285B to S291B, in this embodiment, in addition to the abnormally open state of the big prize opening, the abnormally open state of the variable winning ball apparatus (guard) 20 is also detected. Is done. In this embodiment, when the bonus opening flag is set, the bonus 20 is not opened, and when the bonus opening flag is not set, the bonus 20 is released. It is also described as abnormal opening.

  Next, when the timer after closing the accessory has been set, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the timer value after closing the accessory (step S292A), and whether the value of the game ball number counter in the accessory is 0 or not. It is confirmed whether or not (step S292B). If the value of the game ball number counter in the bonus is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the timer has timed out after closing the bonus (step S292C). If the timer has timed out after closing the accessory, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an accessory inspection display designation command (step S292D). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) in the abnormal signal information timer (step S292E). And the accessory inspection display flag which shows that the inspection display which encourages the inspection in the accessory 20 is performed is set (step S292F).

  As described above, by executing the processing of steps S292A to S292F, in this embodiment, a predetermined time (41.5 seconds in this example) has elapsed after the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20 is closed. Even if all the game balls in the accessory 20 are not discharged, an abnormality signal is externally output to an external device via the information terminal board 34, and an accessory inspection display designation command is transmitted, An accessory inspection display is provided to prompt inspection of game balls in the object.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not an accessory inspection display flag is set (step S292G). If the in-work item inspection display flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the in-work item game ball counter is 0 (step S292H). If the value of the game ball number counter in the accessory is 0, control for transmitting the accessory inspection display release designation command is performed (step S292I), and the accessory inspection display flag is reset (step S292J).

  As described above, when all of the game balls in the accessory 20 are discharged after the accessory inspection display is started by executing the processing of steps S292G to S292J, the accessory inspection display release designation command is issued. Is sent and the accessory inspection display is released.

  In this embodiment, based on the fact that the abnormal signal information timer is set in steps S264C, S264D, S276, S281, S284A, S291A, S288B, S291B, and S292E, the information output processing steps S1069 to S1074 are performed. When the process is executed, an abnormal winning at the grand prize opening, an abnormal winning at the accessory 20, an abnormal winning at the third starting winning opening 13 provided with the variable winning ball device 15, a magnetic abnormality around the accessory 20, When a vibration abnormality of the gaming machine, an abnormal opening of the prize winning opening, an abnormal release of the accessory 20 or a ball clogging in the accessory 20 is detected, an abnormal signal is output to the external device via the information terminal board 34. .

  Further, in this embodiment, as an abnormality of the gaming machine, an abnormal winning at the big winning opening and the accessory 20 and the third starting winning opening 13, a magnetic abnormality around the accessory 20, an abnormal vibration state of the gaming machine, a big winning. When the abnormal opening of the mouth or the accessory 20 or the clogging of the ball in the accessory 20 is detected, an abnormal signal is output to the outside, but the abnormal signal is output based on the detection of another abnormality of the gaming machine. You may make it output externally. For example, an abnormality is detected in the game ball detection unit in the ball payout device 97, a game ball is detected at a timing other than during the payout operation of the ball payout device 97, or a game ball is clogged in the ball payout device 97 On the basis of that, an abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34. Further, for example, an abnormal signal is output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 based on the fact that the payout number count switch 301 cannot detect any game balls even though the payout operation is performed. It may be. In addition, for example, a full tank error has occurred (specifically, an ON signal has been input from the full tank switch 48), or a ball-out error has occurred (specifically, from the ball-out switch 187). An abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 based on the input of the ON signal.

  Further, for example, an abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 based on the detection that an overcurrent has flowed through the power supply circuit mounted on the gaming machine. In addition, for example, a non-connected state between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is detected, or a communication error (for example, a prize ball REQ signal communication error) between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is detected. On the basis of that, an abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34. Further, for example, based on the detection of the unconnected state between the ball payout device 97 and the payout control board 37 and the detection of a communication error between the ball payout device 97 and the payout control board 37, the information terminal board An abnormal signal may be externally output via 34. Further, for example, an abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 based on detection of an abnormality in the random number circuit 503 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560. Further, for example, an abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 based on detecting a short circuit abnormality of the switch power supply of the main board 31.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where only the big winning opening constituted by the opening / closing plate 16 is opened in the big hit gaming state is shown, but the variable winning ball apparatus (the accessory) 20 is also used as the big winning opening. Also good. In this case, the grand prize winning port constituted by the opening / closing plate 16 is referred to as a lower prize winning port, and the grand prize winning port constituted by the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20 is referred to as an upper prize winning port. In this case, when a game ball win is detected in the upper big prize opening in a state other than the big hit gaming state, or a round other than the big hit round in which the upper big prize opening is opened (round in which the lower big prize opening is opened) , It may be determined that an abnormal winning to the upper university winning opening has occurred, and an abnormal signal is externally output via the information terminal board 34. .

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing (step S704) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S611 to S642, the processes in steps S645 to S648, and the processes in steps S653 to S661 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  If the received effect control command is an upper abnormal prize notification designation command (step S643E), the effect control CPU 101 sets an upper abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag (step S644E). If the received effect control command is a lower abnormal prize notification designation command (step S643F), the effect control CPU 101 sets a lower abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag (step S644F).

  If the received production control command is a normal vibration abnormality notification designation command (step S649A), the production control CPU 101 sets a normal vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag (step S650A). If the received effect control command is a winning vibration abnormality notification designation command (step S649B), the effect control CPU 101 sets a winning vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag (step S650B).

  If the received production control command is an upper abnormal release notification designation command (step S651A), the production control CPU 101 sets an upper abnormal release notification designation command reception flag (step S652A). If the received production control command is a lower abnormal release notification designation command (step S651B), the production control CPU 101 sets a lower abnormal release notification designation command reception flag (step S652B).

  If the received effect control command is an accessory inspection display designation command (step S652C), the effect control CPU 101 sets an accessory inspection display designation command reception flag (step S652D). If the received effect control command is an accessory inspection display release designation command (step S652E), the effect control CPU 101 sets an accessory inspection display release designation command reception flag (step S652F).

  132 to 134 are explanatory diagrams illustrating examples of notification screens displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the third embodiment. Note that the initial screen and the power failure recovery screen are the same as the screens shown in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 105A and 105B).

  In FIG. 132 (C1), the effect control CPU 101 displays an upper abnormality notification screen (screen for notifying an abnormal winning to the accessory 20) displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the upper abnormal prize notification designation command. An example is shown, and it is shown that the display of the upper abnormality notification screen is continued even if the change of the production symbol is started (see the right side of FIG. 132 (C1)). In FIG. 132 (C2), the effect control CPU 101 displays a lower abnormality notification screen (screen for notifying an abnormal winning at the big winning opening) displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the lower abnormal winning notification designation command. An example is shown, and it is shown that the display of the lower abnormality notification screen is continued even if the change of the production symbol is started (see the right side of FIG. 132 (C2)).

  The start abnormality winning notification screen, magnetic abnormality notification screen, and vibration abnormality notification screen are the same as the screens shown in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 106D, 107E, and F). . However, in this embodiment, when vibration abnormality notification is performed, two types of vibration abnormality notification are performed depending on whether there is a game ball in the accessory 20 or no game ball. . Specifically, when there is no game ball in the accessory 20, an effect is performed in which only a lamp display corresponding to a vibration abnormality notification is performed. When there is a game ball in the accessory 20, a vibration abnormality notification screen is displayed on the effect display device 9, and a lamp display and sound output corresponding to the vibration abnormality notification are performed.

  In FIG. 133 (G1), an upper abnormal release notification screen (screen for notifying abnormal release of the accessory 20) displayed on the effect display device 9 by the presentation control CPU 101 in response to reception of the upper abnormal release notification designation command. An example is shown, and it is shown that the display of the upper abnormal release notification screen is continued even if the change of the production symbol is started (see the right side of FIG. 133 (G1)). In FIG. 133 (G2), the effect control CPU 101 displays a lower abnormal release notification screen (screen for notifying abnormal opening of the big prize opening) displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the lower abnormal release notification designation command. An example is shown, and it is shown that the display of the lower abnormal release notification screen is continued even if the change of the production symbol is started (see the right side of FIG. 133 (G2)).

  In FIG. 134, the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display display screen (screen for prompting confirmation of the clogging of game balls in the accessory 20) displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the accessory inspection display designation command. ) Example is shown. Note that the display of the accessory inspection display screen shown in FIG. 134 is canceled based on the reception of the accessory inspection display cancellation designation command. Since the value of the in-function game number counter is not 0 while the bonus item inspection display is being performed, the bonus release process in the special symbol process is repeatedly executed (see step S434). ), The next variation of the special symbol and the production symbol is not started.

  135 to 137 are flowcharts showing the notification control process in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S1901 to S1905 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  In step S1906A, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the upper abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag indicating that the upper abnormal winning notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1906B. If the upper abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set, the upper abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1907A), and the effect display device 9 displays the screen displayed at that time. Then, a command to superimpose and display the upper abnormal winning notification screen is output to the VDP 109 (step S1908A). In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays an upper abnormal winning notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 132 (C1)).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating the sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1909A). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, thereafter, sound output (output of an abnormal notification sound) according to the notification of the abnormal winning to the accessory 20 is performed. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal prize notification flag indicating that an abnormal prize is being notified to the accessory 20 (step S1910A), and proceeds to step S1906B.

  In step S1906B, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a lower abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag indicating that a lower abnormal prize notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1911. If the lower abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set, the lower abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1907B), and the effect display device 9 displays the screen displayed at that time. Then, a command to superimpose and display the lower abnormal winning notification screen is output to the VDP 109 (step S1908B). In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays a lower abnormal winning notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 132 (C2)).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating the sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1909B). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, thereafter, sound output (output of an abnormal notification sound) is performed in accordance with the notification of abnormal winning to the special winning opening. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a lower abnormal winning notification flag indicating that an abnormal winning notification has been made to the special winning opening (step S1910B), and the process proceeds to step S1911.

  The processes in steps S1911 to S1922 are the same as those processes described in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1911 to S1916, the notification of abnormal winning to the third start winning opening 13 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 is started. Moreover, the notification of the magnetic abnormality around the accessory 20 is started by executing the processes of steps S1917 to S1922.

  In step S1923A, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the normal vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag indicating that the normal vibration abnormality notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1923B. If the normal vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag is set, the normal vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1924A). Further, it is confirmed whether any of the abnormality notification flags (upper abnormal winning notification flag, lower abnormal winning notification flag, start abnormal winning notification flag, or magnetic abnormality notification flag) is set (step S1925A). ). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1923B. In other words, if an abnormal winning notification or magnetic abnormality notification is already given to the big winning opening, the accessory 20, or the third start winning opening 13, the abnormal winning notification or magnetic abnormality notification is preferentially executed. To control.

  If no abnormality notification flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a lamp control signal for performing lamp display in response to the vibration abnormality notification to the lamp driver board 35 (step S1927A). Therefore, thereafter, lamp display corresponding to the vibration abnormality notification is performed. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a normal vibration abnormality notification flag indicating that vibration abnormality is being notified when there is no gaming machine in the accessory 20 (step S1928A), and the process proceeds to step S1923B. .

  In step S1923B, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a winning vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag indicating that a winning vibration abnormality notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1929A. When the winning vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag is set, the winning vibration abnormality notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1924B). Also, it is confirmed whether any of the abnormality notification flags (upper abnormal prize notification flag, lower abnormal prize notification flag, start abnormal prize notification flag or magnetic abnormality notification flag) is set (step S1925B). ). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1929A. In other words, if an abnormal winning notification or magnetic abnormality notification is already given to the big winning opening, the accessory 20, or the third start winning opening 13, the abnormal winning notification or magnetic abnormality notification is preferentially executed. To control. If no abnormality notification flag is set, the effect display device 9 outputs to the VDP 109 a command to superimpose the vibration abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time (step S1926B). In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays a vibration abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 133 (F)).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the vibration abnormality notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1927B). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormality notification sound) corresponding to the notification of vibration abnormality is performed thereafter. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a lamp control signal for performing lamp display according to the vibration abnormality notification to the lamp driver board 35 (step S1927C). Therefore, thereafter, lamp display corresponding to the vibration abnormality notification is performed. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a winning vibration abnormality notifying flag indicating that a vibration abnormality is being notified when there is a game ball in the accessory 20 (step S1928B), and proceeds to step S1929A. .

  As described above, when the vibration abnormality of the gaming machine is detected by executing the processing of steps S1923A to S1928B, the game ball is different from the case where there is a game ball in the accessory 20 and the case where there is no game ball. Abnormality notification is performed. Specifically, when there is no game ball in the accessory 20, only the lamp display corresponding to the vibration abnormality is executed. In addition, in the case where a vibration abnormality is detected when there is a game ball in the accessory 20, there is a possibility of fraud in which the game ball in the accessory 20 is awarded a V at the specific winning opening by, for example, shaking the gaming machine. Therefore, in addition to the lamp display corresponding to the vibration abnormality, a vibration abnormality notification screen is displayed and an abnormality notification sound is output.

  In step S1929A, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the upper abnormal release notification designation command reception flag indicating that the upper abnormal release notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1929B. If the upper abnormal release notification designation command reception flag is set, the upper abnormal release notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1930A). Also, any abnormality notification flag (upper abnormal winning notification flag, lower abnormal winning notification flag, start abnormal winning notification flag, magnetic abnormality notification flag, normal vibration abnormality notification flag, or winning vibration abnormality notification) It is confirmed whether or not the middle flag is set (step S1931A). If set, the process proceeds to step S1929B. In other words, if an abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality notification, or vibration abnormality notification has already been made to the special winning opening, the accessory 20, or the third start winning opening 13, the abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality notification, or vibration abnormality is reported. Control is performed so that notification is prioritized and continuously executed. If no abnormality notification flag is set, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to superimpose and display the upper abnormality release notification screen on the screen displayed at that time to the VDP 109 (step S1932A). . In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays the upper abnormal release notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 133 (G1)).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal release notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1933A). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of an abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the abnormal release notification is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormally open notification flag indicating that the abnormal release of the accessory 20 is being notified (step S1934A), and proceeds to step S1929B.

  In step S1929B, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the lower abnormal release notification designation command reception flag indicating that the lower abnormal release notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1935. If the lower abnormal release notification designation command reception flag is set, the lower abnormal release notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S1930B). Also, any abnormality notification flag (upper abnormal winning notification flag, lower abnormal winning notification flag, start abnormal winning notification flag, magnetic abnormality notification flag, normal vibration abnormality notification flag, or winning vibration abnormality notification) It is confirmed whether or not (medium flag) is set (step S1931B). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1935. In other words, if an abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality notification, or vibration abnormality notification has already been made to the special winning opening, the accessory 20, or the third start winning opening 13, the abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality notification, or vibration abnormality is reported. Control is performed so that notification is prioritized and continuously executed. If none of the abnormality notification flags are set, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to superimpose the lower abnormality release notification screen on the screen displayed at that time to the VDP 109 (step S1932B). . In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays the lower abnormal release notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 133 (G2)).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal release notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1933B). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of an abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the abnormal release notification is performed thereafter. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a lower abnormal release notification flag indicating that the abnormal winning opening is being notified (step S1934B), and the process proceeds to step S1935.

  In step S1935, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an accessory inspection display designation command reception flag indicating that an accessory inspection display designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1941. If the accessory inspection display designation command reception flag is set, the accessory inspection display designation command reception flag is reset (step S1936). Also, any abnormality notification flag (upper abnormal prize notification flag, lower abnormal prize notification flag, start abnormal prize notification flag, magnetic abnormality notification flag, normal vibration abnormality notification flag, winning vibration abnormality notification) It is checked whether the middle flag, the upper abnormal release notification flag, or the lower abnormal release notification flag is set (step S1937). If set, the process proceeds to step S1941. That is, when an abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality notification, vibration abnormality notification, abnormal opening notification of the special winning opening or the accessory 20 has already been performed to the special winning opening or the accessory 20 or the third start winning opening 13. Then, control is performed so that the abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality notification, vibration abnormality notification, and abnormal release notification are preferentially executed. If no abnormality notification flag is set, the effect display device 9 outputs to the VDP 109 a command to superimpose and display the accessory inspection display screen on the screen displayed at that time (step S1938). . In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays the accessory inspection display screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 134).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the accessory inspection display to the sound output board 70 (step S1939). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormality notification sound) corresponding to the accessory inspection display is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lower accessory inspection display flag indicating that the accessory inspection display is being performed (step S1940), and proceeds to step S1941.

  In step S1941, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an accessory inspection display cancellation designation command reception flag indicating that an accessory inspection display cancellation designation command has been received is set. If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If the accessory inspection display release designation command reception flag is set, the accessory inspection display release designation command reception flag is reset (step S1942).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a command to erase the accessory inspection display screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the VDP 109 (step S1943). The VDP 109 erases the accessory inspection display screen displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the command. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs release data for releasing the sound output corresponding to the accessory inspection display to the sound output board 70 (step S1944). Then, the speech synthesis IC 703 mounted on the speech output board 70 stops the sound output according to the accessory inspection display based on the input release data. Then, the accessory inspection display flag is reset (step S1945).

  As described above, when the processing of steps S1935 to S1945 is executed, the game ball is not discharged from the accessory 20 within a predetermined time (for example, 41.5 seconds) after the accessory 20 is closed. The accessory inspection display is performed, and thereafter, when all the game balls are discharged from the accessory 20, the accessory inspection display is canceled.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where an abnormal signal is externally output or an abnormal release notification is performed via the information terminal board 34 when abnormal opening of a special winning opening or an accessory is detected is shown. When an abnormal opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is detected, an abnormal signal may be output to the outside via the information terminal board 34 or an abnormal opening notification may be performed.

  Further, when performing abnormal notification such as abnormal winning notification, starting abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality notification, vibration abnormality notification, abnormal release notification, etc., the production control microcomputer 100 uses the speaker 27 for sound output and production display device. The abnormality notification may be performed using any one of the display of the abnormality notification screen 9 and the display using the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c, or the abnormality notification may be performed by combining any two or all of them. May be performed. In addition, according to the type of abnormality notification (abnormal winning notification, start abnormal winning notification, magnetic abnormality notification, vibration abnormality notification, abnormal release notification), the sound output using the speaker 27, the abnormality notification screen to the effect display device 9 is displayed. Which of the display and the display using each of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c is used may be changed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the abnormal notification is given priority in the order of the abnormal winning notification, the starting abnormal winning notification, the magnetic abnormal notification, the vibration abnormal notification, and the abnormal release notification. The priority order is not limited to the order shown in this embodiment. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the abnormal commands (for example, the abnormal winning notification designation command, the starting abnormal winning notification designation command, the magnetic abnormality notification designation command, the vibration abnormality notification designation command, and the abnormal release notification designation command) in the order received. The abnormality notification corresponding to the previously received abnormality command may be executed with priority. Further, for example, abnormality notification corresponding to an abnormality command received later may be preferentially executed. Moreover, although the case where only one type of abnormality notification is performed at the same time has been described in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of abnormality notification may be performed at the same time. For example, the abnormal winning notification may be displayed in one display area of the effect display device 9 and the magnetic abnormality notification may be displayed in another display area of the effect display device 9.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the case where the abnormality notification is continuously performed even during the display of fluctuation of the effect symbol is shown, but the abnormality notification is continuously performed even during the big hit game or the small hit game. It may be. In particular, as shown in the third embodiment, in the gaming machine that combines the first type and the second type and the second type gaming machine, the vibration abnormality notification and the discharge error notification are also made during the small hit game. It is desirable to continue to do this.

  Further, when prohibiting a prize ball or prohibiting fluctuation based on the detection of an abnormality, it is the same as a threshold (for example, a second predetermined value) for determining whether or not to transmit an abnormal command. You may decide to use a threshold value to prohibit prize ball payout or change, or you may use a different threshold value to prohibit prize ball payout or change fluctuation. Good.

  Also, in the gaming machine that combines the first type and the second type shown in the third embodiment and the second type gaming machine, as in the second embodiment, on the production control microcomputer 100 side. Alternatively, the number of abnormal winnings may be counted based on the number of commands received from the game control microcomputer 560 to determine whether or not abnormality notification is to be performed.

  In the embodiment described above, the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 25, 28 a, 28 b, and 28 c are controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. However, it may be controlled by a microcomputer mounted on a plurality of control boards. For example, the gaming machine includes a sound / lamp control board equipped with a sound / lamp control microcomputer for controlling the speaker 27 and the lamps 25, 28 a, 28 b, 28 c, and a symbol control microcomputer for controlling the effect display device 9. You may provide the design control board | substrate mounted. In this case, an abnormal command (for example, an abnormal winning notification specifying command, a starting abnormal winning notification specifying command, a magnetic abnormal notification specifying command, a vibration abnormal notification specifying command, an abnormal release notification specifying command) transmitted by the game control microcomputer is: First, it may be received by a sound / lamp control microcomputer. Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer performs sound output and lamp display according to the abnormality notification based on the received abnormal command, and also transmits the abnormal command received from the game control microcomputer to the symbol control microcomputer. It may be transferred (may be transferred after processing). Then, the symbol control microcomputer may cause the effect display device 9 to display an abnormality notification screen based on the abnormality command transferred from the sound / lamp control microcomputer.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the initial signal is input via the information terminal board 34 for a predetermined period from when the reset signal is input on the main board 31 side and the initialization process is executed to clear the backup RAM. A signal indicating that the conversion has been performed may be output to the outside. In this case, based on the execution of the initialization process, the same signal as the abnormal signal that is output when abnormal winning, starting abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, or abnormal release is detected is output externally. Alternatively, a signal different from the abnormal signal may be output to the outside. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally inputting a reset signal to execute an initialization process and aiming for an initial value of a predetermined random number, and notify the outside.

  In addition, in each embodiment shown above, the characteristic structure of the gaming machine as shown in the following (1) to (6) is also shown.

(1) A variable winning device that can change between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, which is capable of performing a predetermined game using the game ball. For example, the special variable winning ball device 20 and the variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined release condition are satisfied (for example, the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit and the game state is changed to the big hit gaming state, the variable symbol variable display) Variable winning device control means for changing the variable winning device from the closed state to the open state when the result is successful (for example, the step of executing step S1476 in the gaming control microcomputer 560. The gaming control microcomputer. 560 to detect the game ball that has entered the variable winning device and the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be opened) When the variable winning device is not controlled to be in the open state by the winning detection means (for example, the count switch 23, the second start port switch 14a) that outputs the winning detection signal and the variable winning device control means, the winning detection means wins. Based on the output of the detection signal, abnormal winning determination means for determining that an abnormal winning has occurred (for example, a part for executing steps S255 to S259 and S263 in the game control microcomputer 560. Steps S267 to S271 and S275 are executed. An abnormal state determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that determines whether or not a predetermined abnormal state (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, abnormal release) that differs from an abnormal prize has occurred in the gaming machine. Steps S279, S282, S285, S286, S28 in 560 And an abnormality notification (for example, abnormal winning notification, start abnormal winning notification) indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the fact that the abnormal winning determining means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred. Abnormality notification means (for example, the portion of steps S835A, S835C, S846, S847B, S1906 to S1916, S1906A to S1916 in the production control microcomputer 100) and the abnormal winning determination means determine that an abnormal winning has occurred. Or an external output means for outputting a predetermined abnormal signal to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) based on the determination that the predetermined abnormal state has occurred Steps S264, S276, 281 and S284 in FIG. S288, S291, S1069 to S1074, S1102, and S1103), and the abnormality notifying means is a predetermined period during which the variable winning device is not controlled to be in the open state by the variable winning device control means (for example, in step S137). The period until the winning prize counter is cleared and the jackpot game is started. The period from when the start winning cumulative number counter is cleared in step S4146 until the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is won. The period from when the abnormal winning cumulative number counter and the starting abnormal winning cumulative number counter are cleared in steps S855A and 855B until the big hit game is started. The period until the start abnormal winning prize counter is cleared based on the fact that the effect control microcomputer 100 has received an effect control command that can specify that the normal symbol variation display result is a win. ) On the condition that the winning detection means has output the winning detection signal a plurality of times (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the game control microcomputer 560 to execute the winning cumulative number counter in step S260). The abnormal winning notification designation command transmitted when it is determined that the value is equal to or larger than the second predetermined value (5), or the value of the start winning cumulative number counter in step S272 is equal to or larger than the second predetermined value (5). (Steps S835A, S835C, S846, S847B, S1906 to S1916, and S1906A to S1916 are executed based on the reception of the start abnormal winning notification designation command transmitted by determining that the external output means is abnormal) Abnormal condition when it is determined by the winning determination means that an abnormal winning has occurred The predetermined abnormality signal can be output from a common output terminal provided in the gaming machine when it is determined by the fixing means that the predetermined abnormal state has occurred (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 is an information An abnormal signal is output to the hall computer using the common connector CN9 of the terminal board 34).
With such a configuration, a predetermined outside of the gaming machine is determined based on the determination that the abnormal winning determination unit has determined that an abnormal winning has occurred or the abnormal state determining unit has determined that the predetermined abnormal state has occurred. Since it is configured to include an external output means for outputting an abnormal signal, information indicating that a plurality of abnormalities have occurred, such as the occurrence of an abnormal winning and the occurrence of a predetermined abnormal state in the gaming machine. Can be output externally. In addition, when the external output means determines that an abnormal winning has been generated by the abnormal winning determination means and when the predetermined abnormal state has been determined to have occurred by the abnormal state determination means, a common provided in the gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to prevent the increase in the number of parts of the mechanism for outputting information to the outside and the complicated wiring work. In addition, an abnormality notification means for executing an abnormality notification indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the fact that the abnormal winning determination is determined by the abnormal winning determination means, the abnormality notification means is a variable winning device control means. The variable winning device is configured to perform abnormality notification on the condition that the winning detection means outputs the winning detection signal a plurality of times during a predetermined period when the variable winning device is not controlled in the open state. It is possible to notify that a winning abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act, and as a result, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act with respect to the variable winning device.

(2) The gaming machine variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, effect symbols) that can be identified, and displays a display result (for example, an effect display device 9), and progress of the game Including a variable prize device control means, an abnormal prize judgment means, an abnormal condition judgment means and an external output means, and electric parts for production (for example, production display device 9, speaker 27, lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c) ) Including a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for outputting an effect control command for controlling the game control means, and an abnormality notification means. Effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100), and the game control means is a variable table of identification information in the variable display device. Variable display command transmission means for transmitting a variable display command (for example, a variation pattern command) that can specify the start and variable display time (for example, a part for executing steps S29 and S102 in the game control microcomputer 560); Detected cumulative number storage means (for example, winning cumulative number counter, start winning prize) for storing the cumulative number that the winning detection means output the winning detection signal during a predetermined period when the variable winning device is not controlled to be open by the variable winning device control means (Accumulated number counter), a predetermined abnormality notification reference value (for example, a second predetermined value (5)) for determining whether or not to perform abnormality notification, and the cumulative number stored in the detected cumulative number storage means. , An abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification (for example, abnormal prize notification designation command, start abnormal prize notification designation) And anomaly notification command transmission means (for example, a portion for executing steps S29, S262, and S274 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means is a variable display transmitted by the variable display command transmission means. Variable display control means for starting the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device based on the command and deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display device when the variable display time has elapsed (for example, step in the production control microcomputer 100) The abnormality notifying unit executes abnormality notification based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmitting unit (for example, the production control microcomputer 100). In step S643 Steps S1906 to S1909 and Steps S1911 to S1915 are based on the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag set in Step S644 and the abnormal starting notification notification designation command reception flag set in Step S646 when Y in Step S645. When the variable display control means is executing variable display of the identification information on the variable display device, abnormality notification can be executed (for example, steps S835A and S835C in the production control microcomputer 100). , S846, S847B, S1906 to S1916).
According to such a configuration, the game control means transmits the variable display command that can specify the start of variable display of the identification information and the variable display time in the variable display device, and the variable winning device control. In order to determine whether or not to execute abnormality notification, and a detected cumulative number storage means for storing the cumulative number of the winning detection means that output the winning detection signal during a predetermined period when the variable winning device is not controlled to be open by the means. An abnormality notification command transmitting means for transmitting an abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification based on the predetermined abnormality notification reference value and the cumulative number stored in the detected cumulative number storage means, and the effect control means includes Based on the variable display command transmitted by the variable display command transmission means, the variable display device starts variable display of the identification information, and the variable display time has elapsed. Variable display control means for deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display device, the abnormality notification means performs abnormality notification based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmission means, and the variable display control means Since the abnormality notification can be executed even when the variable display device performs variable display of the identification information, it is possible to notify that a prize abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act on the variable winning device. As a result, fraudulent acts on the variable winning device can be surely prevented. Further, by executing the abnormality notification on the side of the effect control means, it is possible to notify the abnormality of the winning due to the illegal act on the variable winning device without increasing the processing load of the game control means.

(3) The gaming machine variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, effect symbols) that can be identified, and displays a display result (for example, an effect display device 9), and the progress of the game Including a variable prize device control means, an abnormal prize judgment means, an abnormal condition judgment means and an external output means, and electric parts for production (for example, production display device 9, speaker 27, lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c) ) Including a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for outputting an effect control command for controlling the game control means, and an abnormality notification means. Effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100), and the game control means is a variable table of identification information in the variable display device. Variable display command transmission means for transmitting a variable display command (for example, a variation pattern command) that can specify the start and variable display time (for example, a part for executing steps S29 and S102 in the game control microcomputer 560); An abnormality detection command (for example, abnormal) indicating that an abnormal winning is detected based on the fact that the winning detection means outputs a winning detection signal during a predetermined period when the variable winning device is not controlled to be open by the variable winning device control means. Including an abnormality detection command transmission means for transmitting a winning detection designation command, a start abnormal prize detection designation command (for example, a portion for executing steps S29, S266B, and S278B in the game control microcomputer 560). Abnormality detection transmitted by the abnormality detection command transmission means Based on the command, the detected cumulative number storage means (for example, in FIG. 117) stores the cumulative number that the winning detection means outputs the winning detection signal when the variable winning device control means is not controlled to the open state by the variable winning device control means. The variable display device starts variable display of identification information based on the variable display command transmitted by the variable display command transmitted by the variable display command transmission means and the variable display time when the variable display time has elapsed. Variable display control means for deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display device (for example, a portion of steps S835A to S837, S841 to S850, and S853 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the abnormality notification means A predetermined abnormality notification reference value (for example, FIG. 11) for determining whether to perform notification. 7) When the abnormality display is executed based on the predetermined value (5) shown in FIG. 7 and the accumulated number stored in the detected accumulated number storage means, and the variable display control means is executing variable display of the identification information in the variable display device. In addition, it may be configured such that abnormality notification can be executed (for example, a portion of steps S835A, S835C, S846, S847B, and S1906A to S1916 in the production control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, the game control means transmits the variable display command that can specify the start of variable display of the identification information and the variable display time in the variable display device, and the variable winning device control. An abnormality detection command transmitting means for transmitting an abnormality detection command indicating that an abnormal winning is detected based on the fact that the winning detection means outputs a winning detection signal during a predetermined period when the variable winning device is not controlled to be open by the means. And when the variable winning device is not controlled to open by the variable winning device control means based on the abnormality detection command transmitted by the abnormality detection command transmitting means, the winning detection means outputs a winning detection signal. The detected cumulative number storage means for storing the cumulative number of output and the variable display command transmitted by the variable display command transmission means The variable display device starts variable display of the identification information on the basis of the variable display device, and when the variable display time has passed, the variable display control unit derives and displays the display result on the variable display device. Abnormality notification is executed based on a predetermined abnormality notification reference value for determining whether or not to execute and the cumulative number stored in the detected cumulative number storage means, and the variable display control means changes the identification information in the variable display device. Since it is configured so that the abnormality notification can be executed even when the display is being executed, it is possible to notify that a winning abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act on the variable winning device, and as a result, the variable winning device Can be reliably prevented. In addition, the cumulative number is stored on the production control means side, and abnormality notification is executed based on the cumulative number, thereby detecting a winning abnormality due to an illegal act on the variable winning device without increasing the processing burden on the game control means. be able to.

(4) The gaming machine includes opening detection means (for example, an opening detection sensor 92) that outputs an opening detection signal when the variable winning device is in an open state, and the abnormal state determination means is variable by the variable winning device control means. When the winning device is not controlled to be in the open state, it is determined that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred in the gaming machine based on the fact that the open detection means has output the open detection signal (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 560). (Steps S285 and S286 in FIG. 5) may be configured.
According to such a configuration, it is provided with an opening detection means for outputting an opening detection signal when the variable winning device is in an open state, and the abnormal state determining means controls the variable winning device to the open state by the variable winning device control means. Since it is determined that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred in the gaming machine based on the fact that the release detection means has output the release detection signal when the release is not performed, it is possible to notify the unauthorized act in advance. , It is possible to expedite discovery of fraud and improve the effect of notifying fraud. In addition, since the occurrence of fraud is reported before profits are provided to the fraudster, a deterrent effect against fraud is produced.

(5) The external output means outputs a predetermined abnormality signal to the external device when it is determined by the abnormal winning determination means that an abnormal winning has occurred or when the abnormal condition determining means determines that a predetermined abnormal condition has occurred. Can be output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and when a predetermined abnormal signal is output, when the abnormal winning determination means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred, or the abnormal condition determination means When it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred, the external device is determined from the last time that the abnormal winning determination unit determines that an abnormal winning has occurred or the abnormal state determining unit determines that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred. A predetermined abnormality signal can be output for a predetermined period of time (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 can perform steps S264 and S276). By executing 281, S284, S288, S291, S1069 to S1074, S1102, and S1103, as shown in FIG. 70, an abnormal signal is externally output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the abnormality was detected. When another abnormality is detected after 30 seconds have passed since the start of external output, an abnormality signal is output externally until 30 seconds have elapsed since the last abnormality was detected. Also good.
According to such a configuration, when the external output means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred by the abnormal winning determination means or when the predetermined abnormal state has been determined by the abnormal state determination means, the external device A predetermined abnormality signal can be output for a predetermined period of time, and when the predetermined abnormality signal is output, when the abnormal winning determination means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred or when the abnormal condition determination means When it is determined that a condition has occurred, the external device is determined from the last time that the abnormal prize determination means determines that an abnormal prize has occurred or the abnormal condition determination means determines that a predetermined abnormal condition has occurred. Since it is configured to be able to output a predetermined abnormal signal for a predetermined period of time, an abnormal winning will occur on the external device side that receives the predetermined abnormal signal State or a predetermined abnormal state can be informed to recognize that it is prolonged.

(6) The first start condition is satisfied after the first execution condition of variable display is satisfied (for example, winning to the first start winning opening 13) (for example, it is not fluctuating but is not in big hit / small hit) First variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 8a) that starts variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) that can be identified based on the ) And the second execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, winning to the second start winning opening 14), and the second start condition is satisfied (for example, when it is not fluctuating but not in big hit / small hit) Second variable display means (for example, second special symbol display 8b) for starting variable display of second identification information (for example, second special symbol) that can be identified based on each and deriving and displaying the display result. , First variable display means and second variable table A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on any of the means, and the external output means has a first output Execution condition establishment information output means for outputting execution condition establishment information (for example, start port 1 signal) indicating that the execution condition is established when the execution condition is established and when the second execution condition is established. (For example, the part for executing steps S1001 to S1030, S1102, and S1103 in the game control microcomputer 560), the execution condition establishment information output means includes the first execution condition and the first execution within a preset period (eg, 200 ms). When the two execution conditions are satisfied, the execution condition satisfaction information based on the satisfaction of one execution condition is output and Execution condition establishment information based on the establishment of the other execution condition can be output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the processing of steps S1025 to S1029, thereby When a signal is output, a new start port 1 signal may be output after 200 ms has elapsed since the end of the output of the signal).
According to such a configuration, the external output means outputs execution condition satisfaction information indicating that the execution condition is satisfied when the first execution condition is satisfied and when the second execution condition is satisfied to the external device. When the first execution condition and the second execution condition are satisfied within a preset period, the execution condition is based on the satisfaction of one execution condition. Since the execution condition establishment information based on the establishment of the other execution condition can be output after a preset period has elapsed since the establishment information was output, the establishment of the first execution condition and the second execution Even when the conditions are satisfied continuously within a preset period, the execution condition establishment information based on the satisfaction of each execution condition can be recognized by the external device.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game using a game ball.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 1st special symbol display 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 15 Variable winning ball apparatus 9a 1st decoration design display 9b 2nd decoration Symbol display 20 Special variable winning ball device (big prize opening)
31 Game control board (main board)
34 Information terminal board 56 CPU
560 Game Control Microcomputer 80 Production Control Board 90 Magnetic Sensor 91 Vibration Sensor 92 Opening Detection Sensor 100 Production Control Microcomputer 101 Production Control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

After the game ball has won the first start area, the first start information based on the first identification information that can be identified based on the fact that the first start condition that enables the start of the variable display based on the win is established. A first variation display means for starting a variation display of 1 and deriving and displaying a display result; and a second start condition that allows a variation display based on the winning to be started after a game ball has won the second start area And second variation display means for starting the second variation display based on the second identification information that can be identified and deriving and displaying the display result based on the fact that the first variation display means or A gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the second variation display means,
A variable winning device capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter;
Variable winning device control means for changing the variable winning device from a closed state to an open state when shifting to the specific gaming state;
A winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning device and outputting a winning detection signal;
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling the effect means based on a command from the game control means,
The game control means includes
The first variation by the first variation display means when the first start condition is satisfied on condition that neither the first variation display nor the second variation display is executed. First variation display start means for starting display;
When the second start condition is satisfied on the condition that neither the first fluctuation display nor the second fluctuation display is executed, the second fluctuation display by the second fluctuation display means is performed. Second variation display start means for starting display;
A first variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern including a variation display time from the start of variation display of the first variation display to the end of variation display in the first variation display means in which the first start condition is satisfied. For selecting a variation pattern including a variation display time from a variation display start time to a variation display end time of the second variation display in the second variation display means in which the second start condition is satisfied and the selection process. The second variation pattern selection process is executed by the same processing routine, and the variation display of the variation display in the variation display means in which the variation display start condition is satisfied among the first variation display means and the second variation display means. A variation pattern selecting means for selecting a variation pattern including time from a plurality of variation patterns;
Based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means, first data indicating a variation display time of variation display executed in the first variation display means when the first start condition is satisfied; Fluctuation display time storage means for storing, in the same storage area, second data indicating the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display executed in the second fluctuation display means when the second start condition is satisfied;
Abnormal winning determination that determines that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the fact that the winning detection means has output the winning detection signal when the variable winning device is not controlled to be open by the variable winning device control means. Means,
State determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined state different from the abnormal winning has occurred in the gaming machine;
In order to output a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine based on the determination that the abnormal winning determination means has caused an abnormal winning or the state determining means has determined that a predetermined state has occurred. External output means,
The production control means includes abnormality notification means for executing abnormality notification indicating that the abnormal winning has occurred, based on a command transmitted when the abnormal winning determination means determines that the abnormal winning has occurred. Including
The external output means is a common provided in the gaming machine when the abnormal winning determination means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred and when the predetermined determination state is determined by the state determining means. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined signal can be output from an output terminal of the game machine.

Images